frenic4600fm5d cdjs1fvx-5316a ver - fuji electric · · 2016-06-06we are grateful for your...
TRANSCRIPT
INR-HJ5235-E
214 pages in total Version 1 Mar 01, 2013
FFFRRREEENNNIIICCC444666000000FFFMMM555ddd
INR-HJ5235-E- -
Introduction
We are grateful for your purchase of our IGBT inverter FRENIC4600FM5d for 6.6kV direct motor drive.
The FRENIC4600 FM5d series offers high-performance and easy-maintenance inverters developed by integrating most advanced power electronics and microelectronics based on our company's long experience in AC variable speed drive technology and abundant achievements in application to plants.
This instruction manual describes the functions, specifications and hardware/software of the FRENIC4600FM5d series, and explains the indication and setting items necessary for operation.
0-1
INR-HJ5235-E- -
Precautions for safety
・The precautions indicated here concern important matters related to safety.
You are requested to observe them without fail. The safety precautions are classified into
ranks of "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
Wrong handling may cause death, heavy injury or other serious results.
Wrong handling may cause serious results depending on the case.It is assumed that You may get moderate injury or slight injury, and only that physical damages may occur.
・Warning label indications for precautions are labeled on the transformer panel, exterior surface and interior of inverter.
CAUTIONRisk of injury, electric shock and
fire. Read the instruction manual,
etc. before maintenance, checkup
or repair.
Do not proceed to maintenance, checkup or repair unless you are in charge of maintenance.
Turn off input power
before maintenance,
checkup or repair.
Risk of electric shock.
Do not touch live parts
when the door is open at
an energized status.
Risk of electric shock.
Connect ground.
DANGER
CAUTIONRisk of injury.
Do not introduce
stick or finger.
Descriptions in ” Caution” also may run into heavy results depending on conditions .You should observe both descriptions of DANGER and CAUTION without fail, because important items are described.
Note:- Heavy injury means blindness, injury, burn injury, electric shock, bone fracture, poisoning etc. ,
by which you may have aftereffects and require hospitalization for long periods or attending a hospital for medical treatment .
- Moderate injury means burn injury, electric shock etc. by which you don’t require hospitalization for long periods or attending a hospital for medical treatment.
- Physical damages means damages of assets and expanded damages of devices.
Risk of electric shock.
Never touch when
voltage is applied.
CAUTION
DANGER
0-2
INR-HJ5235-E- -
CAUTION
DANGER
DANGER
CAUTION
DANGER
Because this inverter system has a high voltage circuitry in its interior, the panel has
a double structure to avoid an electric shock. Before maintenance work, however,
the main circuit breaker and make sure the DC circuit discharged.
(For making sure the DC circuit is discharged, confirm the "CHARGE" LEDs VPM and VNM in each inverter
cell are completely extinguished.)
・Execute it after surely doing appropriate processing like the earth etc. when you work.
・Refer to the attached paper manual when you work maintaining.
・The electrical discharge time of the direct current voltage of the inverter cell is about 20 minutes.
・This equipment is applied to operate only a induction motor . Therefore, this can not be applied to other use.
・ This equipment can not be applied to such uses as a life support machine directly related to human bodies. ・ We manufacture this products under severe quality control, you should install the safety device when you will apply this product to the equipment that may occur serious failures or may cause serious damages due to failures of this product.
Application
・Mount on such incombustible platforms as metals.
・ Don’t locate this near combustible materials.
Installation
・ Don’t allow such different materials as waste paper, paper, waste wood, dust, waste metal to enter into this equipment, or adhere at the cooling fan.
・ Never operate by installing this product with such equipment that is damaged or lack parts.
・When you connect this equipment to power supply, perform wiring through a circuit protection breaker.
・ Connect earth wire to the ground without fail. ・ Carry out the wiring after making sure power supply has been OFF(Open.)
・ Never switch on the product of which part was damaged, dropped off , or damaged during transportation.
Wiring
・Make sure that phase number and rated voltage of the product correspond to those of power supply.
・ Noise may be generated by this equipment and motor wirings. Pay attention to malfunction of neighboring sensors and devices.
DANGER
0-3
INR-HJ5235-E- -
DANGER
DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
DANGER
・Never touch radiating fins and transformers because of high temperature.
・ When you waste this product, treat this as an industrial waste.
Waste
・ Never modify this product.
Others
・ Switch power supply ON (Close) after mounting the surface cover (after closing the door if door type construction is adopted ) without fail. In addition, never remove the door cover during electrified condition. You may get electrical shock.・ Never operate the switch with wet hands.
You may get electrical shock.・ Never touch terminals even under suspension during this equipment is electrified.
You may get electrical shock.
Operation
・Turn off all the input power supplies after opening the input breaker and completely turning off "CHARGE LED VPM and VNM" in each inverter cell, and confirm voltage detector to the work after it energises of the check. Confirm the I/O terminal is 25V or less after confirming the voltage is not impressed by the voltage detector. Surely ground the main circuit I/O terminal of the medium voltage inverter device with the earth treatment device after it confirms it, and work afterwards.
・ Never allow other than specified person to perform maintenance and checkup or replacement of parts. (Remove such metal goods as watches, finger rings before working. )(Use insulated tools. )
Maintenace and checkup, and replacement of parts
InverterCell
OVGR
EN
EA
Medium voltage VVVF panel
Isolated from panel
Isolated fromchannel base
Input3.3kV/6.6kV
Motor3.3kV/6.6kV
About driving immediately after the installation・The product is installed about 2-6 months from the following beginning of mission are not abnormal though the smell is generated from the insulating material (varnish etc.) used for the input transformer though it depends on the driving pattern.
Earth treatment device
Earth treatment device
R
S
T
U
V
W
0-4
INR-HJ5235-E- -
DANGER
0-5
・Do the earth wiring according to the figure below earth system chart and the table of the size of the earth electric wireYou may get electrical shock.
About the earth system
IFCCTR
InverterCell
OVGR
EN
EA
EA-VF1
EA-VF2
ACL
(Option)
Input3.3kV/6.6kV
Shielded cableShielded cable
(Option)
ED
EC
EB
EB EC ED
① ②
③ ④ ⑤Medium voltage VVVF panel
Isolated from panel
Isolated fromchannel base
Rated voltage Capacity ①EA ②EN ③EB ④EC ⑤ED
~750
750~1800
60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 38mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 5.5mm2 or more
60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 5.5mm2 or more
60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 100mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 5.5mm2 or more1800~2300
6.6kV
Earth system chart
Table of size of earth electric wire
EA-VF1
EA-VF2
ED
EC
EBEarth only for medium voltage inverter(VVVF panel exclusive use)Earth only for medium voltage inverter(Exclude the VVVF panel.)
Earth only for transformer neutral point and for prevention of misconnectionEarth for safety of low-voltage devices, class C for use in common with AC440V devices.
Earth for PC and PC I/O strage
Motor3~
INR-HJ5235-E
Contents
Chapter 1 INVERTER SPECIFICATIONS1-1 Configuration of Inverter System 1-11-2 Inverter Dimension 1-21-3 Inverter Potential Levels 1-31-4 Options 1-31-5 Inverter Specifications 1-4
Chapter 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION2-1 Basic Unit 2-12-2 Optical Conversion Unit 2-112-3 Local Controller 2-122-4 Over voltage ground detection signal receiving card (ORC) 2-162-5 PROFIBUS Transmission Unit (PSB) 2-172-6 MICREX Transmission Unit (DSM) 2-202-7 Modbus Transmission Unit (MOD) 2-212-8 Expanded DIO Card (DIO) 2-222-9 Analog Output Unit (AO) 2-242-10 Relay Unit 2-25
Chapter 3 TOUCH PANEL3-1 General 3-13-2 Explanation for using Keys, LED and LCD 3-13-3 Functions of Touch Panel keys 3-23-4 Explanation on the Touch panel Display Screen 3-33-5 Change diagram on Display Screen 3-43-6 Explanation of Example of Operation on Touch Panel 3-93-6-1 Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel 3-93-6-2 Operation from Touch Panel 3-123-6-3 Referring to Fault Codes on Touch Panel when faults have occurred 3-13
Chapter 4 SETTING DATA4-1 List of Control Parameters Setting 4-14-2 List of Detailed Control Parameters Setting 4-13
Chapter 5 INDICATION & OUTPUT DATA5-1 Analog outputs and Transmission sending internal Data 5-15-2 DI (X terminal) Function Selection Data Codes 5-55-3 DO (Y terminal) Function Data Codes 5-85-4 Internal Digital Data Indication 5-125-5 Actual Value Notation Data Indication 5-16
Chapter 6 Transmission Data6-1 PROFIBUS Transmission 6-26-2 DSM (D-LINE, T-LINK) Transmission Data and Modbus transmission 6-156-3 Transmission RAS 6-21
Chapter 7 FAULT DIAGNOSIS7-1 Fault Cause Indication 7-17-2 Fault Codes 7-27-3 Fault Code Details 7-107-4 Loader and Trace back Data 7-317-5 Trouble Shooting 7-33
Chapter 8 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE8-1 Preventive maintenance 8-1
INR-HJ5235-E- -
Chapter 1 Inverter Specifications
1-1 Configuration of Inverter System
[1] 6.6kV Specifications
1-1
Basic controller
Transformerpanel
Converter Panel
Touch panel (OP)
M
Opticalconverter unit
EOU
Relay unit
Control StackDi/DO
Optical fiber cable firing signal
1ΦAC200V・220V
Transmission line
Digital Datainput /output
Optical fiber cable status
signal
Main circuit power supply3ΦAC6000V・6600V/50・60Hz
PSU
OVG
1×9
Controller Panel
AO(OP)
DIO(OP)
(OP)
AO
Analog data output
U1 cell
U2 cell
U3 cell
V1 cell
V2 cell
V3 cell
W1 cell
W2 cell
W3 cell
3ΦAC220V
POD
MOD(OP)
DSM, MODorPSB(OP)
Loader (OP)
INR-HJ5235-E- -1-2
1-2 Inverter dimensions
Converter panel
Transformer panel& Control panel
Converter panelTransformer panel& Control panel
Fig.1
C
A
B
2350
E
2000
570
780
6.6kVspecifications
960
1120
1320
670
2300
1540
Fig.2
470
Fig.1
1750
Fig.2
C
A
B
2550
E
3000
3000
3000
3000
3400
3400
3400
3400
4100
4100
4100
1900
1900
1900
1900
2000
2000
2000
2000
2400
2400
2400
1100
1100
1100
1100
1400
1400
1400
1400
1700
1700
1700
535
535
535
535
535
535
535
535
375
375
375
1300
1300
1300
1300
1400
1400
1400
1400
1500
1500
1500
Capacity[kVA] B
(Transfomer)C
(Converter) depth
Dimensions[mm]
A(Overall)
Receiving voltage E
(Fan)
Outlinediagram
※The panel externals are a previous notice and might change. Inquire details separately.
INR-HJ5235-E- -
DANGER
DANGER
Option
1-4 Options
Device option
Card option
DSM
DIO
Name
MICREX transmission connection card
Digital internal data input/output card
Application
Touch panel
(standard)
Loader
Carries out parameter setting, display, change, and start and stop. Simplified version of loader.
A notebook PC for parameter constant setting, simultaneous change and status display, and start and stop. Data monitoring and trace-back functions are installed.
System option Commercial frequency operation changeover circuit.
Dial thermom-
eter
Input transformer ambient temperature detection and overheat contacts.
1-3 Inverter Potential Levels
Name
Control stack
Inverter cell
Insulation classLocation
Control printedcircuit board,etc.
Main circuit parts
Control printedboard, etc.
Remarks
-
1-3
Before work, discharge and then ground the main circuit
Before work, discharge and then ground the main circuit
Insulation classes for this high voltage inverter are as follows. Pay utmost attentionwhen operating.
DANGER
INR-HJ5235-E- -
FRENIC4600FM5d
1-4
1-1) Square reduction loading specifications (Standard Specification)
Current limit of inverter output
Frequency of inverter output
Receiving voltage
Frequency
Voltage
Outpu
t Capacity
Rating
Operation mode
Accuracy
Range
System
Contro
lA
mbie
nt conditio
ns
Installation place
Tempera-ture
Humidity
Housing panel
Cooling
Atmosph-ere
Protective structure
Rated current
1-5 Inverter Specifications
1) Standard specifications of FRENIC4600FM5d
[Hz]60502550
80%
105%
70%
(Note 1) The current limit value of the inverter output changes as follows in the square reduction loading specifications.
3φ, 6600 VAC / 50/60 Hz
6600 V AC (proportional to input voltage)
0.2 to 60 Hz (120 Hz max. optionally)
2 quadrants (no regenerative braking)
Digital setting frequency: ±0.01%Analog setting frequency: ±0.5%
1 : 50
V/F constant control (simplified sensor-less vector control)
Indoor, altitude of 1,000 m or lower
0 to +40℃
20 to 85% RH, condensation unallowable
Self-standing and enclosed panel
Forced air cooling
640 V AC 12 circuits (6.6 kV specifications:at 6.6 kV input)
Normal environment free from corrosive gas, dust and inflammable/explosive gases
100% continuous
60 sec
1120 1540 2300780
98 134 20268
470
41
570
50
670
59
960
84
1320
115
1750
153
2000
173
120% 105% 120% 105% 120% 105% 120% 105%
INR-HJ5235-E- -
2) Control functions
The FRENIC4600FM5d series incorporates 32-bit RISC processors for the CPUs in the basic control sectionconcerned with frequency control, operational sequences, interfaces, etc. and also in the current controlsection, voltage control command shaping section and output voltage pulse waveform shaping sectionrespectively which require high-speed computation. The system is thus firmwared to permit optimal controlin various applications and has the following functions:
① Sequential function
Software is designed to provide functions for operating and stopping the system according tothe external sequence and control signals.
② Regulating function
Regulating function for optimal control based on sampling control theory.
③ Control parameter setting function
The touch panel, loader, POD or centralized monitoring system can be used to set controlparameters for each system or control parameters for optimal adjustment.
④ Fault detecting function
If a fault occurs, information about it can be checked on the touch panel display, POD,loader or centralized monitoring system. In addition, trace-back data on conditionsbefore and after the fault can be collected by the loader or centralized monitoring system.
⑤ Independent motor operation function
Motor can be operated independently with the FRENIC4600FM5d series alone,disconnected from the host system.The system is so configured that any of transmission operation, external input contact operation,analog command operation and console operation is available.For operating procedure in independent operation, refer to "3. TOUCH PANEL."
⑥ Power failure protection function
In the event of power failure, protective measure will be taken through interruption.The data in RAM is protected with a capacitor and remains intact for one week.In addition, setting data do not vanish in no electricity condition because of back-upin non volatile RAM (flash ROM.)
⑦ Online analog data output
For part of data in operation, analog output is available.
1-5
INR-HJ5235-E- -
3) Outline of software
① Processing assignment
The microprocessor is composed of a main CPU, ACR-CPU and a PULSE CPU, to which processing tasks are assigned as follows.
[Basic unit]
[Main CPU]
・ To operate and stop the inverter according to external sequence and control signals.
・ To regulate voltage, limit current and control output frequency
・ To compute parameters for ACR-CPU and exchange operational data.
・ To detect faults.
・ To set or change control parameters.
・ To compute analog frequency setting
[ACR-CPU]
・ To regulate active current
・ To regulate reactive current
・ High-speed vector computation to detect current and issue command and voltage command computation
・ Analog data output
[Pulse distribution CPU]
・ To compute PWM gate pulse and pulse dividing by voltage command
Provided with a microprocessor, carries out an optical communication for different statussignals with control units of the basic section.
[Local CTR]
・ To detect DC voltage
・ To fire initial charge thyristor
・ To monitor inverter cell inside fault
・ IGBT drive by conversion of optical gate signal from "Pulse distribution unit" into electrical signal
1-6
INR-HJ5235-E- -
Command value from MICREX or PROFIBUS
Rated frequency
Select desired mode
OperationON
To AVR
FoutFin
Acceleration/deceleration value from MICREX or PROFIBUS
Acceleration/deceleration time in setting No. 29 to 38 and 45 to 54
FIN
FOUT
0
0
Command value by touch panel setting
Inching frequency setting value in No. 9 to 10 and 57 to 70
Acceleration/deceleration computing element (HLR)
T1 T3 T4T2
T1・T3: Acceleration time
T2・T4: Deceleration time
Timing chart
t
t
Command value from analog frequency setter
Example for when acceleration/deceleration pattern "0" is selected.
Note) Order of decreasing precedence of frequency command value setting is: MICREX (or PROFIBUS) or Touch panel frequency command, AI frequency command, DI frequency command. Moreover, the frequency instruction setting is maintained the selected frequency setting mode in the motor during starting, and cannot switch the mode to the in operation.
For avoiding an overvoltage by rise of DC voltage generated at regenerative braking, you can select a function of stopping the deceleration action at a voltage rise (setting No. 161-1).
1-7
③ Acceleration/deceleration computer (HLR)
The acceleration/deceleration time can be set to those which set by setting No. 29 to 38 and 45 to 54, or patterns selected by setting No. 25. In case of operation linked with MICREX (or PROFIBUS), those times can be changed from MICREX (or PROFIBUS).For details of acceleration/deceleration pattern selection, refer to the section (pp. 4-24 to 25) of description of setting items.
② Resonance point jump function
For avoiding a resonance by operation frequency of mechanical system, the resonance point jump function can be set with up to 3 points. Also, the jump width can arbitrarily be set.This system is configured as a single phase inverter, and therefore, the jump width can be set in order to avoid the operation at 1/2 frequency of commercial frequency.
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑤ Voltage regulator (AVR)
The deviation of estimated voltage Vout from voltage command value V* is subjected to proportional computation (P) and integration computation (I), and the computed values are added as PI computation.The action when the output has attained a limit value is different between PI computation and IP computation.At PI computation, the I output is limited to (limit value - P output) or, at IP computation, the I output is limited to a limit value.The proportional band and integration time which are parameters of PI computation can be changed from the touch panel, dedicated loader .
F*
Setting filter
-+
-
(P)
+
+
(I)
Iq
Active currentlimitation
Zero hold
Vout
④ Magnetic flux command computing element
The operation efficiency can be enhanced according to a load status by changing the magnetic flux command from V/F constant control.
Basic V/F pattern
Ratedvoltage
Base frequency
Suppose No. 20 is 100% setting, voltage command at 1/2 frequency is (1/2)2 = 25%.
0
×
Magnetic fluxcommand
V*
1/2 base frequency
1-8
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑥ Current limit regulator
If an output current has exceeded the setting, the frequency command and voltage command are changed to prevent the output current from increasing.If this regulator is validated, an increase of a load at a constant speed operation (at drive) lowers the operation frequency, thereby lowering the motor speed of revolution.
+
-
Current limit command
Output current detection
Output limitation
Overcurrent computation
Setting filterAcceleration/deceleration
computing element
+
-
Output frequency command
Magnetic flux command
Output update
1-9
Input frequency command
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑦ Operation/stopping sequence control (LSS)
The start time sequence is such that an external operation condition input gets ready the circuit breaker ON which, in turn, initiates an initial charge. Circuit breaker answer input, charge end signal and other conditions met make the control ready to receive a frequency command.
Undervoltage detection level
External electrical condition input
Electrical condition end output
Circuit breaker ON
DC voltage detection
Circuit breaker ON condition end output
Circuit breaker ON end answer-back input
Operation start input
Frequency setting input reception
Motor speed
T2: Fixed timer (0.5 sec)
6 to 8 seconds from circuit breaker ON to charge end
ON timing is from external operation condition input to
immediately before operation start
RD
ERD
RNMC
Di_RUN
Do
Di
Signal
Signal
In-run output SS
From timing when all operation conditions are met
Inverter cell inside thyristor firing
T1: Charge check timer (setting No. 116)T1 T2
1-10
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑧ Current regulator (ACR)
3-phase AC current (without neutral point connection) has 2 degrees of freedom. Therefore, at least 2 current regulators (ACR) are required.In the FRENIC4600FM5d series, vector calculation is performed and the current regulation of 2 components (DC values) of active current/reactive current is carried out by the 32-bit RISC processor.
When the system has become ready for operation, active/reactive current command values, ACR zero hold release command and other control parameters are input from the main CPU.The output current values detected, on the other hand, are subjected to 3 - 2 phase conversion and vector rotation to convert from AC to DC values (active/reactive current detection values), which are input to each ACR.This active current regulator output and frequency command are added, the sum is multiplied by the magnetic flux command for creating a voltage command, 2 signals output from the reactive current regulator are input to the vector computing element for carrying out the above inversion, thereby obtaining 3-phase AC commands.Based on the 3-phase voltage commands, output gate pulses are created by the voltage command shaping section and a multi-level waveform where output voltage waveforms are approximated to sinusoidal waves.
VD-/~
VD-/~
2φ/3φ
3φ/2φ
sinθcosθ
∫ω
+
-
+
-
θ
Iα
Iβ
Iu detection
Iv detection
Iw detection
To the voltage commandshaping section
VU*
VV*
VW*
Vα
Vβ
ET
EM
Reactive current
regulator
Reactive current
detection
Active current
regulator
Active current
detection
Active current command
Reactive current
command
VD:Vector Rotating Device
2φ/3φ: 2-phase to 3-phase converter
3φ/2φ: 3-phase to 2-phase converter
Output frequency
command
Magnetic flux command
+
+
1-11
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑨ Overload detection operation (OL)
To prevent a motor from burning, overload detection is effected by simulatively computing temperature rises from motor current.
The differential equation for representing a heat model of motor is given below.
C dθ/dt + hθ = Q
θ : Rise from ambient temperature
Q : Input quantity of heat
C : Heat capacity of motor
h : Coefficient of heat radiation
When Q = 0 and = 0 with t < 0, the differential equation can be solved as follows.
θ = Q/C (1 - e-ht/C)
Therefore, using the square of motor current (I) as heat input in the system, we have:
×
Thus, the software detects an overload in the following block.
QθI T
θQPrimary lag
No 169[358] Overload continuous ratingNo.170[359] Overload setting currentNo.171[360] Overload setting time
Overload continuous rating 2
Overload detectionCurrent detection
×
Ratio to motor rated current
If No. 170[359] overload setting current is allowed to flow at t = 0, an overload is assumed after a lapse of No. 171[360] overload setting time.The overload allowance is 100% when no current flows, or 0 when an overload is detected.
The inverter has 2 overload computing functions, one for motor protection and the other for inverter protection.
Note)Set No. in [ ] is a set number when "Motor 2" is selected.
- ÷Overoadallowance
OL
Overload in-compuation output
Overload continuous rating
1-12
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑩ Speed search function
A pickup operation function for motor during free run operation is installed. Whether to validate or invalidate the search mode when starting can be determined by the setting item.
Action in search mode
Frequency command reception
Pulse ON
Search end
Acceleration/deceleration computing element actuation
a) Search validated when starting
Time until starting as per No. 94 setting
b) Search invalidated when starting
Frequency command reception
PulseON
Search end
Acceleration/deceleration computing element actuation
1-13
INR-HJ5235-E- -
On speed search at free run restart
Free run start
Motor speed of revolution
Motor voltage
Inverter output frequency command
Inverter pulse ON command
Speed search command
AVR action command
Setting No. 115 (voltage zero detection delay timer)
5 to 10 times the motor secondary time constant
1/2 of time by setting No. 94 [Magnetic fluxsetting filter time constant]
Depends on acceleration setting time
Gradient determined by motor secondary time constant
Replace frequency command after 1/4 of time by No. 94 from pulse ON
1-14
5%
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑪ Function of continuing operation at momentary power interruption
The function of continuing operation at momentary power interruption is installed.
Whether to validate or invalidate the continuing operation mode at momentary power interruption can be determined by the setting item.
Motor speed of revolution
Inverter output frequency command
Depends on acceleration setting time
T1 T2
f1
Detection of momentary power
interruption
The following conditions is for continuing the operation when momentary power interruption occurred .
Time of momentary power interruption T1< operation continuation timer at momentary power
interruption, and
Time of momentary power interruption T1 < power failure detection timer, and
Inverter output frequency of operation at momentary power interruption f1 > Setting No.286 lowest
operation frequency at momentary power interruption
Deceleration time at momentary power interruption is determined according to deceleration time
determined by setting No. 287 and overvoltage control function (DC voltage detection value ≧ HLR
stop with rated voltage.)
Refer to pages of 4-53 to 61 for details.
T2: Restoration checking time 25ms
1-15
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑫ Line/Inverter Changeover function
Line/Inverter Changeover function is installed.
Inverter frequency command
Inverter output current
Bypass current
Inverter output voltage
Switching from inverter operation to line operation
Synchronous switching from inverter to line command
Synchronous completion
signal
Pulse on command
T1
Possible to set synchronous accelerating time T1 by No.40 setting.Possible to select "Major fault 1" or "No fault record" for Circuit-breaker switching fault by setting No.173-2 .
Inverter circuit-breaker answer
Bypass circuit-breaker answer
Synchronous processing
Major fault 1 over 1000ms or No fault
1-16
INR-HJ5235-E- -
Inverter frequency command
Inverter output current
Bypass current
Inverter output voltage
Line/Inverter Changeover action (from line to inverter operation)
Switching from line to inverter command
Synchronous completion
signal
Pulse on command
Bypass circuit-breaker answer
Inverter circuit-breaker answer
Synchronous processing
Major fault 1 over 1000ms or No fault
Possible to select "Major fault 1" or "No fault" for Circuit-breaker switching fault by setting No.173-2 .
1-17
INR-HJ5235-E- -
⑬ PID regulation function
PID regulator output function for frequency command is installed.
1-18
=command-FB
a
-a
b
2b
When PD regulator(Setting No.334=0)
1.37*bTd
(No.335)
-b
b
-2b
When PI regulator(Setting No.335=0)
b
b
b
b
-b
When P regulator,(Setting No.334=No.335=0)
2b
Ti
When PID regulator
b
b
b
2bTi
2b
b
b
b
b = 1/P * a
(No.334)
b = 1/P * a
b = 1/P * a
b = 1/P * a
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
b
b
On Off
(No.334)
-b
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2-1 Basic Unit (TYPE: CDJC1FCU-5131□)
[1] Major specifications
CPU
ROM
RAM
Serial input/output 1
Serial input/output 2
Relay input
Relay output
Analog input
Analog output
Digital output
Serial input/output 4
V850(32bit RISC CPU) × 3
Item
1Mbytes
1Mbytes(capacitor back-up)
RS-232C or equivalent (for loader connection)
For touch panel connection
Optical loop transmission (for connecting between inverter cells)
24V×15 points
24V×9 points
±10V×8 points
±10V×4 points
Pulse output ×8 points
Specification
2-1
- - INR-HJ5235-E
[2] LED, SW, Connectors layout
1) Appearance of main frame CRT
2-2
CN25
CN
14
CN2
CN27
CN26
CN
9
CN
18
CN
1
CN
5C
KP
1C
N11
SW
6
SW
5
CN
10
CKP
2
CN
4
CN
3
CN
15
CN
16
LED2
LED1
CN6
CN
7
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2) Option cards when mounted
2-3
CN6
CN25
CN
14
CN2
CN27
CN26
CN
9
CN
18
CN
1
CN
5C
KP
1C
N11
SW
6
SW
5
CN
10
CKP
2
CN
4
CN
3
CN
19
CN
15
CN
16
LED2
LED1
CN
7
DSM card<DSM>
- - INR-HJ5235-E
[3] Connectors
Name
8 Input of control power supply (5V,15V)
number of pins RemarksApplication
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN7
CN9
CN10
CN11
CN14
CN15
CN16
CN18
CN25
CN26
CN27
2
30
30
20
9
10
10
6
8
20
20
14
2
1
1
Input of control power supply (24V)
8 bit option (1)
8 bit option (2)
Relay unit connection (PG, Ai)
Loader / External AO connection
Touch panel connection
DCCT
Line voltage / detection of instantaneous power interruption
CN6 40 Relay unit connection (DI, DO)
Analog output
Optical conversion board connection (1)
Optical conversion board connection (2)
CPU flash writer
Power supply for options
Sending multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells
Receiving multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells
DSM card etc.
DIO etc.
2-4
- - INR-HJ5235-E
[4] Connector allocation
Pin No.
P15 +15V input (for analog)
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
MA
N15
P5A
M
M
0V input (for analog)
-15V input (for analog)
unassigned
+ 5V input (for digital)
+ 0V input (for digital)
ditto
6 P5A ditto
CN1 details
Pin No.
P24 +24V input (for Relay)
Name RemarksFunction
1
2 M24 0V input (for Relay)
CN2 details
Pin No.
AI1 Input 1 of analog frequency command (Current input) [Signal]
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
MA
MA
AI2
AI3
MA
Input 1 of analog frequency command (Current input) [common]
10V output
0V (analog)
Input 2 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Signal]
Input 3 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Signal]
Input 3 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Common]
6 MA Input 2 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Common]
CN5 details
Spare9
10
11
12
13
15
16
MA
MA
MA
0V (for analog)
Spare
Spare
0V (for analog)
Spare
0V (for analog)
14 MA ditto
17
19
20 MA
Spare
Spare
0V (for analog)
18 MA 0V (for analog)
2-5
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Pin No.
DI1 Electrical conditions (RD)
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI7
DI8
DI operation command (RUN)
Input of circuit-breaker answer back (52X)
Input of earth fault detection (OVG)
Input of Major fault of fans/ temperature systems (TEMPA)
DI X1
DI X2
6 DI6 Input of Minor fault of fans/ temperature systems (TEMPB)
CN6 details
DI9 DI X39
10
11
12
13
15
16
DI10
DI11
DI12
DI13
DI15
DI X4
DI X5
DI X6
DI X7
DI X9
unassigned
14 DI14 DI X8
17
19
20 30X
unassigned
Output of Major fault or Major fault 1 (FTH or FTH1)
18 unassigned
Selectable by setting No.254 (see page of 4-47)
DO1 Output of electrical condition ready (ERD)
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO7
Output of Minor fault 1 (FTL1)
DO Y1
DO Y2
DO Y3
DO Y5
unassigned
26
DO6 DO Y4
unassigned29
30
31
32
33
35
36
P24
P24
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
unassigned
+24V output (for Relay)
ditto
34 unassigned
37
39
40
P24
M24
M24
ditto
ditto
ditto
38 M24 + 0V output ( for Relay)
DO8 DO Y6
2-6
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Pin No.
P15 +15V input (for analog)
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
N15
MA
-15V input (for analog)
AC current detection (Iu)
AC current detection (Iu) [for sealing]
0V input (for analog)
6
-2.5V to +2.5V
-2.5V to +2.5V
CN10 details
9
10
P15 +15V input (for analog)
N15
MA
-15V input (for analog)
AC current detection (Iw)
AC current detection (Iw) [for sealing]
0V input ( for analog)
Pin No.
Vuv Line voltage detection (Vu-v) [signal]
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
MA
Vwv
MA
Line voltage detection (Vu-v) [common]
Line voltage detection (Vw-v) [signal]
Line voltage detection (Vw-v) [common]
Control power interruption detection [signal]
6
-10V to +10V
-10V to +10V
-10V to +10V
CN11 details
MA Control power interruption detection [common]
2-7
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Pin No.
AO1 AO CH1 output
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
MA
AO2
MA
AO3
0V
AO CH2 output
0V
AO CH3 output
6
CN14 details
MA 0V
7
8
AO4
MA
AO CH4 output
0V
Pin No.
P24 +24V output ( for Relay)
Name RemarksFunction
1
2 M24 0V output ( for Relay)
CN25 details
Name Short circuit Operation
Switches
SW5 1-2 short circuit CN9 connection MMI selection
SW6 1-2 short circuit Run into test mode of controller
Name
Green Light when control power supply turns on.
Color Operation
LED1
LED2 Red Light when CPU is abnormal.
LEDs
Note) Setting value of SW6 is available after resetting power supply.
2-8
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Pin No.
AO1 AO CH1 output
Name Operation
1
2 AO2 AO CH2 output
CKP1 details
AO3 AO CH3 output3
4 AO4 AO CH4 output
Iu Iu current detection. Refer to the output scale to the table below.5
6 Iall Output current detection. Refer to the output scale to the table below.
P15 +15V power supply (for analog ) for checkup7
8 P5 + 5V power supply (for analog ) for checkup
N15 -15V power supply (for analog ) for checkup9
10 MA 0V power supply (for analog ) for checkup
2-9
Used for testing in our factory. You never use this connector. CAUTION
Nominal capacity[kVA]
6.0kV 6.6kV
Output voltage at inverter ratings Iu
current peak[V]
420 470 3.65500 570 4.42600 670 5.22700 780 6.09860 960 5.221000 1120 6.091200 1320 5.221400 1540 6.091600 1750 4.611800 2000 5.222100 2300 6.092360 2600 4.52
3.774.575.396.285.396.285.396.284.765.396.284.67
Output voltage at inverter
ratings output current peak[V]
- - INR-HJ5235-E2-10
Pin No.
P3R3 +3.3V power supply (for digital) for checkup
Name Operation
1
2 P5B + 5V power supply (backup for digital) for checkup
CKP2 details
P4R5 +4.5V power supply (for digital) for checkup in conjunction with reset3
4 P5A + 5V power supply (for digital) for checkup
FA Simulation PG output (A phase)5
6 FB Simulation PG output (B phase)
M 0V power supply (for digital) for checkup7
8 M 0V power supply (for digital) for checkup
Used only for testing in our factory. Never use this connector. CAUTION
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2-2 Optical conversion unit (Abbrev.:EOU,TYPE:CDJC1EOK-5145C(6.0kV))
1) Optical conversion unit (CDJC1EOK-5145C(6.6kV))
[1] Major specifications
Item
Gate pulse data optical transmission interface between controller and cells
Specification
Serial transmission
4Mbps
Dedicated optical cable
Serial
Transmission speed
Cable
Transmission spec.
[2] Connector layout
2-11
Name
1 Gate pulse signal for U1 cell
Number of pins
RemarksApplication
TM1
TM2
TM3
TM4
TM5
CN15
CN16
1
1
1
1
20
20
Gate pulse signal for U2 cell
Gate pulse signal for V1 cell
Gate pulse signal for V2 cell
Gate pulse signal for W1 cell
Gate pulse signal for W2 cell
1
For controller (CTR) connection (1)
For controller (CTR) connection (2)
[3] Application of connectors
CN16 CN15
TM1 TM2 TM3 TM4 TM5 TM9 TM10 TM11 TM12
TM9
TM10
TM11
TM12
1
1
1
Gate pulse signal for U3 cell
Gate pulse signal for V3 cell
Gate pulse signal for W3 cell
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2–3 Local Controller (TYPE:CDJC1FCU-5150A・B)
[1] Major specifications
Classification
Controller(CTR)
CPU
Serial input 1
Serial input 2
Serial input 3
DC voltage detection input
NTC input
Digital input
Digital input
V850(32bit RISC CPU) × 1
Item
RS232C or equivalent (for loader)
Gate pulse optical transmission
Optical loop transmission (for connection between inverter cells)
2 points
2 points
DC24V×3 points
Pulse output × 9 points
Specification
2-12
[2] SWs and connectors layout
DANGER
CN1
CN
2
CN3
CKP
1SW
3C
N4
TM1 RM1 RM2
TBM
TBN
TBP
SW1
VPM VNM LNK PWM PON ERR RUN
SW
4
SW2
- - INR-HJ5235-E
[3] Connector and terminals
Name
8 For control power supply input and thyristor gate pulse
Number of pins RemarksApplication
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
TM1
RM1
8
16
8
1
1
For unit inside DI detection and NTC
For gate pulse output
For loader connection
Sending multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells
Receiving multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells
For software installation
1 For DC voltage detection [P side]TBP
1 For DC voltage detection [M side]TBM
1 For DC voltage detection [N side]TBN
Pin No.
P24 +24V input
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
M
P24
M
PDOWN
P24
0V input
+24V input
0V input
For detection of power supply voltage drop
+24V input
For thyristor gate pulse output
6 M 0V
CN1 details
Pin No.
Spare
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
M
DCFUSE
M
NTC
0V
For detecting DC FUSE blown
0V
For detection of cooling fins temperature
6 M 0V
Fault if open
CN2 Details
RM2 1 Receiving pulse signal optical transmission
7 NTC2 For detection 2 of cooling fins temperature
8 M 0V
2-13
- - INR-HJ5235-E
[4] Rotary SW name
Note) Setting value of SW1 is activated after resetting power supply.
Name/Setting
0 Spare
Operation
SW2
Switches
1 U1 cell inverter selection
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0 - F
U2 cell inverter selection
V1 cell inverter selection
V2 cell inverter selectionW1 cell inverter selection
W2 cell inverter selection
U3 cell inverter selection
U4 cell inverter selection
V3 cell inverter selection
V4 cell inverter selection
W3 cell inverter selection
W4 cell inverter selection
Spare
Pin No.
P24 +24V output
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
P24
P24
P24
Q2-2 gate pulse signal
+24V output
Q1-2 gate pulse signal
+24V output
+24V output
Q3-2 gate pulse signal
6 Q4-2 gate pulse signal
CN3 details
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
14
P24
P24
P24
P24
+24V output
Q4-1 gate pulse signal
+24V output
Q3-1 gate pulse signal
+24V output
+24V output
Q1-1 gate pulse signal
Q2-1 gate pulse signal
SW3,4 For testing in our factory
2-14
SW3 and SW4 are only for testing in our factor. Never use these SWs. CAUTION
SW1
D
E
F
6.0kV specification 10kV specification
Spare
0
1
W1 cell inverter selection
W2 cell inverter selection
U1 cell inverter selection
U2 cell inverter selection
U3 cell inverter selection
V1 cell inverter selection
V2 cell inverter selection
W3 cell inverter selection
V3 cell inverter selection
U5 cell inverter selection
V5 cell inverter selection
W5 cell inverter selection
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
U1 cell inverter selection
U2 cell inverter selection
W1 cell inverter selection
W2 cell inverter selection
Spare
6.0kV specification
V1 cell inverter selection
V2 cell inverter selection
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Inverter cell inside element names
AC2
AC1
Q1-2
Q2-2
Q3-2
Q4-2
Q1-1
Q2-1
Q3-1
Q4-1
P sideMain circuit voltage
VPM
VNM
IGBT1 IGBT3
IGBT4IGBT2
D2D1
N sideMain circuit voltage
Pin No.
P3R3 For +3.3V power supply checkup
Name Operation
1
2 P5 For + 5V power supply checkup
CKP1 details
VREF10 For +10V power supply checkup3
4 M For 0V power supply checkup
DO01 DO CH1 output5
6 DO02 DO CH2 output
DO03 DO CH3 output7
8 DO04 DO CH4 output
RST Resetting output9
10 M For 0V power supply checkup
Only used for testing in our factory. Never use this connector.
Name
Green Light when control power supply switch ON (light when +5V power supply is +4.75V or more)
Color Operation
RUN
ERR Red Light when CPU is abnormal.
LEDs
PON Red Light when pulse ON.
LNK Red Light when multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells is abnormal.
VPM Red Light when P side main circuit voltage is 15V or more.
VNM Red Light when N side main circuit voltage is 15V or more.
PWM Red Light when gate pulse signal optical transmission is abnormal.
2-15
CAUTION
CAUTION
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Item
Over voltage ground detection signal receiving card(Optical receiving card for power supply loess earth fault detection type)
Description
Over voltage ground
detection signal
250kbps
Special optical cable
Pulse signal
Transmission speed
Use cable
Transmission spec.
[2] SWs and connectors layout
NameNumber of pins Application
4 For testing in our factoryCN1
[3] Connector
60 For CTR connectionCN28
2-16
1 Over voltage ground detection signal optical receivingRM22
CN28RM22
CN11
2-4 Over voltage ground detection signal receiving card (Abbreviated as ORC,TYPE:EP4947AC1) [Optinal]
[1] Major specifications
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2-5 PSB cards(Abbreviated as PSB,TYPE:CDJC1PSB-5142A [Optional]
[1] Major specificationsIt is a board which communicates the slave by PROFIBUS-DP V0 and V1.
Item
PROFIBUS transmission interface
Description
PROFIBUS 9.6, 31.25, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500, 1500, 3000, 6000, 12000kbit/s
PROFIBUS-DP V0、V1
Transmission speed
Protcol
[2] SWs and connectors layout
[3] Connector
NameNumber of pins RemarksApplication
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN10
IC7
30
9
8
2
40
For controller (CTR) connection
For PROFIBUS transmission cable connection
For testing in our factory
For PROFIBUS side power supply connection
For testing in our factory
It connects it with CN25 of CTR, 24V
FG 1 For fraem ground connection
2-17
CN
2
CN5
IC7
RUN
S0S1
S2
CN
3 CN10
FG
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Pin No.
unassigned
Name RemarksFunction
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
RxD/TxD-P
VP0V
RxD/TxD-N
unassigned
Sending and receving signal (+)
unassigned
0V power supply (for digital)
unassigned
Sending and receving signal (-)
6 VP5V + 5V power supply (for digital)
CN3 details
9 unassigned
Pin No.
VP24A +24V power supply (for Relay)
Name RemarksFunction
1
2 VP0A 0V power supply (for Relay)
CN10 details
Name
Green Light when PSB cards is oprateing.
Color Operation
RUN
S0 Red
It is shown that making to the parameter is an incomplete end. At the time of a high-speed blinking (every about 0.5 seconds):
The PSB card is abnormal. At the time of a low-speed blinking (every about one second):
The PSB card memory is abnormal.
LEDs
S1 Red Light when a configulation isn't finished.
S2 Green Light when it is shown to be exchanging data.
2-18
- - INR-HJ5235-E
D-SUB 9PIN
Connector fixation screw
A) When node is used on the way
Terminator switch(Use it by turning off. )
B) When you use the beginning node or the terminal node
The cable to the beginning edge and the terminal equipment (equipment with which only one cable is connected) connects the figure below with a left terminal A1 and the terminal B1 toward(①), and turns on the terminator switch of the connector(②).
As for connected node, PLC and the terminal node usually become the beginning nodes with the equipment such as active terminators because of all equipment connected with not only the PSB card equipped with the inverter but also PROFIBUS.
ToA1,B1
FromA2,B2
②Terminator switch
Make it to turning on for the PROFIBUS terminal.
Two is connected and use the cable by turning off because it is not a terminal when you go to other equipment such as active terminators and optical converters.
①The cable is connected with a left terminal A1 and the terminal B1.
[3] Connected connector externals explanation (Type:6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0)
2-19
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2-6 MICREX Transmission Unit (Abbreviated as DSM,TYPE:EP4385C1) [Optinal]
[1] Major specifications
CN
19
CN
20
Item
MICREX transmission interface(DLA to D-LINE/IFC to D-LINE/T-LINK)
Description
Serial transmission
500kbps
Twisted pair cableKPEV-SB 0.5sq × 1 pair
Half-duplex, Serial transmission
Transmission speed
Cable
Transmission spec.
Name Number of pins Application
3
Screw terminals for D-LINE/T-LINK transmission cable connection
CN19
30 For controller (CTR) connectionCN20
1
Pin No.
2
3
Description
Signal line 1
Signal line 2
Shield wire
Note:
Either blue or white line of cable may be
connected to signal lines of 1 and 2.
2-20
[2] SWs and connectors layout
[3] Connector
- - INR-HJ5235-E
CN
1
TB
1
SW
1 S
W2SW11
CN5
NameNumber of pins Application
3
Screw terminal for twist cable connection with shield
TB1
30 For controller (CTR) connectionCN1
8 Loader connection (For soft installation)CN5
For Modbus connection Be short-circuited when you use the Modbus transmission.SW1
SW2 Spare
Built-in terminator living Make the best use of a built-in terminator when this option card becomes a terminal on the transmission line.SW11
1 2
31 2
3
1 2 3
1-2 short circuit
2-3 short circuit For POD connection Be short-circuited when you use the POD.
1-2 short circuit
2-3 short circuit Built-in terminator no living
2-21
Item
Modbus transmission interface(DLA to D-LINE/IFC to D-LINE/T-LINK)
Description
Serial transmission
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps
Twisted pair cable
Half-duplex, Serial transmission
Transmission speed
Cable
Transmission spec.
2-7 Modbus Transmission Unit (Abbreviated as MOD,TYPE:EP4930C1) [Optinal]
[1] Major specifications
Protocol Modbus RTU (ASCII mode is unsupported.)
1
Pin No.
2
3
Description
Signal line (+)
Signal line (-)
Shield wire
[3] Connector
[2] SWs and connectors layout
[4] SW name
Name Setting Operation Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2-8 Expanded DIO cards (Abbreviated as DIO,TYPE:OPC-VG7-DIO) [Optional]
[1] Major specifications
Item Description
Input 24V, 4 points (3mA)
24V, 8 ponts (50mA max)
CN
1
CN
2
SW
1
SW
2
It is possible to connect current sink (SINK) and current source (SOURCE.)Output
Name Number of pins RemarksApplication
30 For controller (CTR) connectionCN1
36 For DIO connectionCN2
Name
SINK/SOURCE changeover
Application Remarks
SW1
SW2 DIOA/DIOB changeover Use by fixing DIOA.
2-22
[2] SWs and connectors layout
[3] Connectors
[4] SWs
- - INR-HJ5235-E
CN2
1,6
45
32
X11X12X13X14CM
CM
Xn
0V
24VSINK
CM
Xn
24V
0VSOURCE
Switching over DI between SINK and SOURCE with SW1
13Y11
14Y12
15Y13
16Y14
17Y15
31Y16
32Y17
33Y18
18CME
or
24VCN1CN4
CN25
Note: Plugs and Housing are attached. Plugs (Type; 10136-3000VE Sumitomo 3M 36 pins) Housing (Type; 10336-52F0-008 Sumitomo 3M 36 pins)
2-23
[5] Connector allocation
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2–9 Analog Output Unit (Abbreviated as AO,TYPE:EP4454C2) [Optional]
[1] Major specifications
Each analog data is output by setting analog output data code (see pages of 5-1 to 4) tooutput selection setting number.Output of each channel is output to both a jack and a connector.
J1P
CN4 CN3
Connectionto Loader
Connection toBasic Unit
CN1
2-24
J1M
J2P
J2M
J3P
J3M
J4P
J4M
Item
±10V, 4 points, insulated output (Note: 0V is common.)
Description
Analog output
[2] Jacks and Connectors layout
[3] Jacks and Connectors
Jack output Connector output Remarks
Setting Number
CN1(1) Setting No.229J1P
Channel
AO data 5
AO data 6
AO data 7
AO data 8
CN1(3)J2P
CN1(5)J3P
CN1(7)J4P
0V common CN1(2) to (8)J1M to J4M
Outputselection No. Gain Offset
Setting No.242 Setting No.243
Setting No.230 Setting No.244 Setting No.245
Setting No.231 Setting No.246 Setting No.247
Setting No.232 Setting No.248 Setting No.249
- - -
[4] Attention when connecting itInsert the connector on the controller side of the inverter at the end when you connect the analog output unit and the loader. Separate from the controller side connector first when you separate.
Basic Unit
CN
7
Analog Output Unit
CN4 CN3 Loader
CAUTION
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2–10 Relay Unit (Abbreviated as RY,TYPE:RKJW1YXK-1173A - D)
[1] Appearance of Relay Unit
Name Number of pins
RemarksApplication
20CN5
40CN6
27 Terminal block for wiringTB1
13 Terminal block for wiringTB2
39 Terminal block for wiringTB3
For CTR connection (for Ai)
For CTR connection (For DI, DO)
CN
5
CN
6
TB1TB2
TB3
DO contact capacity・ Contact outputSignal name Relay typeFTH、FTL、ERD、Y1、Y2、Y3 G2R-2A(OMURON)Contact capacity AC250V 5A DC30V 5A at resistance load
AC250V 2A DC30V 3A at inductive load
Signal name Relay typeSSR(Option:Y3 and exclusive use) AQC1AD1-24V(MATSUSHITA)Contact capacity DC60V 1A at resistance load
・Transistor outputSignal nameY4、Y5、Y6Transistor output current 50mA
24V power supply capacity for use Terminal between 7-21・・・・330mA or less
Power supply for variable resistance Terminal between 37-38・・・・ Variable resistance 1 to 5kΩDC10V、10mAmax
ER
DFTHFTL
Y1
Y2
Y3
SSR
2-25
[2] Connectors and terminals
- - INR-HJ5235-E
To Basic UnitCN5
To Basic UnitCN6
CM
Xn
0VRy
24V
CME
Yn
0V Ry
24V
2-26
5
11Spare
0V4
10
3
9
Spare
Spare
0V
0V
1
7Spare
0V
13AI1 (Current input)
0V
6
38AI2 (Voltage input)
0V
18
Frequency command, PID command etc.
40V Ry
23
OVG
TEMPA
TEMPB
24
5
14+24V
35
Y4
4
FTL1 17
3
Y1 16
6
ERD 19
5
FTH or FTH1 18
Electrical condition ready
Major fault 1 output
Minor fault 1 output
Selection DO1
TB2 TB1
CN
5
0V12
2
8Spare
0V2
Y2 15
1
Y3 14
Selection DO2
Selection DO3
CN
6
23
9
22
8
24
X1
X2
X3
X4
0V Ry
Function selection DI
10
11
25
52X
RUN
0V Ry
Circuit breaker answer back
DI operation command
12
26RD
0V Ry
Electrical condition ready 1
39AI3 (Voltage input)
0V
19
3710V
TB3
TB3
1
21
20
X5
X6
0V Ry
Y534
28
8 ERD
29
9 FTH or FTH1
30
10 FTL
31
11 Y1
32
12 Y2
33
13 Y3
Electrical condition ready
Output of Major fault or Major fault 1
Output of Minor fault 1
Selection DO1
Selection DO2
Selection DO3
Function selection DO
2X7
22X8
3X9
Function selection DI
6
25
0V Ry
13
27
Electrical condition ready 2
RDElectrical condition 1
Major fault of FTS
Minor fault of FTS
Earth fault orTransformer overheat
Major fault
27
7
26
52X
RUN
0V Ry
Circuit breaker answer back
DI operation command
Y615
[3] Terminal block allocation
(By setting No.254)
*FTS: fan and temperature system
7+24V
210V Ry
(By setting No.254)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
When mounting and removing the touch panel on or from the inverter, after turningoff the main circuit and the control power supply switch and check the light-outof the touch panel without fail, perform the work.
Indication
LED Display
LCD(Liquid Crystal) Display
RUN-LED
Keys
3-2 Explanation for using KEY, LED and LCD
3-1 General
The touch panel has simplified functions of those of the loader, and moreover, is added with some functions which are not built in the loader.The touch panel has such major functions as referring and changing inverter setting data, referring ※AIO and DIO, indication data, sending/receiving data with PROFIBUS, D-LINE and T-LINK, operation stop, referring fault codes, ※fault records and internal data when faults occur.
A mark “※”shows that only touch panel has such functions.
Indicating comments or data etc. All screens indicate descriptions for operation keys in the lowest line. (Scrolling)
Maximum 5 lines×13 characters
7 segments 4 figures
While the inverter is operated, lighting while Pulse-On.
Remark
5 lines ×13 characters
Green
Name
LCD(Liquid Crystal)Display
RUN-LED
Appearance of Touch Panel
Normally display Frequency actuality values (Hz).“Err.” is indicated when faults occur.When PRG key is pressed for 2 seconds, indicating a address number to jump.
7 segments 4 figures
LED Display
3-1
CAUTION
- - INR-HJ5235-E
3-3 Functions of Touch Panel Keys
Key Function
By pressing this key, return to the monitor display which is the initial indication when power switch was ON. By keeping to press for 2 seconds or more, switch to changeover mode to jump to optional display number. (LED with 7 segments blinks)
Shift the figure to change to the right by one figure (Cursor) when changing setting data and display number. When the figure to change is at the most right side, it is rolled to the most left side.
Display of touch panel returns to the upper step by one.Faults are reset when faults have occurred. (on fault indicating screen, or monitor screen)
Increasing one datum when changing setting data and indication number. Moving the cursor inversion line to upper line (mode selection, setting classification selection.)Moving the display number to the upper number by one (the number decreases.)
Decreasing one datum when changing setting data or indication number.Moving the cursor inversion line (mode selection, setting classification selection) to the lower line.Moving the indicating number to the lower number by one (the number increases.)
Defining (Saving) data when changing data or indication number. Defining the cursor inversion line (mode selection, setting classification selection) and moving to the lower step by one.
Operating forward drive with the digit (no Polarity) +FWD when operating from the touch panel. Pressing this during reverse revolution drive to turn to forward drive with the same speed.
Operating counter revolution drive with the digit (no Polarity) +REV when operating from the touch panel. Pressing this during forward revolution drive to turn to reverse revolution drive with the same speed.
Stopping with STOP key when operating from the touch panel (Loader.)However, this key is invalid when operated by command from transmission Di or Ai.
3-2
- - INR-HJ5235-E
3-4 Explanation on the touch panel display screen
Monitor screen: Indication when turning on power supply. Jumping from arbitrary screen using PRG key.Indicating the present inverter command and detection. Using ∧,∨ keys, screen changes.
Menu indication:M01 SET DATA :Setting items (※No. 001 to 379), No. 999 (only when no setting)M02 DIO :Indicating ON/OFF of DI and DO (※No. 381 or larger)
□:OFF, ■:ONM03 AIO :Indicating input/output voltage of Aiand AO.M04 ACTUAL VAL :Indicating the inverter internal data (※No.400 to)M05 TRANSMIT. :Indicating PROFIBUS, D-LINE and T-LINK transmission and
sending/receiving data (※No.600 to)M06 RUN/STOP :Operation from the touch panelM07 CONDITION :Indicating the start-up condition. (※No.380)M08 FAULT LIST :Indicating the up-date fault code
Maximum: 20 factors (※No.901- 920)M09 FAULT HIS. :Indicating 100 data of the past fault codes in chronological order.M10 TRIP DATA :Indicating the inverter command and detection data
:when fault has occurred. (Each data shows 1 point)M11 AUXILIARY :Auxiliary functions such as Setting date and time,
Utilization hours, Setting control, Software type, Liquid Crystaladjustment, Indication Test, Automatic Test. etc.
M12 AUTO TUNE. :For testing functions in our factory.
1/2 screen
Abbrev. Name Unit
F* Frequency command Hz
F* A Output frequency Hz
IDET Current detection A
VEST Output voltage estm. V
Overload Over load allowance %
Vdc DC voltage detection V
Pout Inverter output power kW
2/2 screen
A mark “※”shows that You can directly refer the relevant number with direct jump.(See page of 3-11 for using procedure.)
3-3
- - INR-HJ5235-E
3-5 Change diagram on the Touch Panel Display Screen (1/5)
Monitor screen
∧,∨:Switching
monitor 1/2,2/2
8) Fault screenDisplay Date, Fault quantity
Menu screen
∧,∨:Selection
of M01 to M12
1) Setting screen・ Setting classification∧,∨: Classification selection
"1"0 0
Pressing for 2 seconds or more on the arbitrary
screen
Fault
Occurrence of Fault on arbitrary screen.
E r r .
No indication of Err. After fault reset
Jump to indication screen of each No.
(To B)
LED blinking
After fault reset
Fault Reset when fault has occurred
2)DIO display・DIO No. list
∧,∨: No. selection
・ Setting No.
∧,∨: No. selection
・ Setting display
∧,∨: Next setting
・Setting change
∧,∨: Data change
>>: Figure movement
of cursor
When selecting no
setting
Jump to a number not
yet sepecified
Save
Cancel
・BIT display
∧,∨: Scroll
To next page
3)AIO display・AIO No. list
∧,∨: No. selection
・AIO [V] display
∧,∨: No. movement
4)Internal data display・ No. list
∧,∨: No. selection
・Internal data display
∧,∨ No. Movement
A
B
No.381 to 387 No.401 to 499
No.001 to 379No.999
Fault Reset when fault
has occurred
Pressing on the arbitrary screen
3-4
Monitor screen
∧,∨:LED Data change
- - INR-HJ5235-E
5) transmission data
・Classification list
∧,∨: Classification
selection
6) Operation
・ Operation monitor
screen
・No. list
∧,∨: No. selection
・ Operation monitor
screen
∧,∨,>>:Frequency
setting change
A
B
・Data display
∧,∨: No. movement
・BIT display
∧,∨: Scroll
・RAS display
∧,∨: No. movement
RAS selection
"1"000LED flicking
To next page
C
D
Forward revolution Drive
Reverse revolution
Drive
When establishing start-up conditions
No.600 to 799
Operation Cancel
LED indication:Frequency setting
Frequency settingInput mode
Change diagram on the Touch Panel Display Screen (2/5)
3-5
- - INR-HJ5235-E
7) Start-up condition
・BIT display
∧,∨: Scroll
C
DTo next page
E
F
8) Fault screen
Date and Time, Fault
numerical quantity
display
・Fault display
・No. list
∧,∨: No. selection
・ Fault item display
∧,∨: No. movement
No.380
No.901-920
9) Fault history
・ Fault code, Date
display
∧,∨:Scroll
10) Trip Data,
・Date and Time,
Fault numerical
quantity display
・ Data display
・BIT display
∧,∨: Scroll
Change diagram on the Touch Panel Display Screen (3/5)
3-6
※The fault histories are registered up to 100. When the number of fault history registration exceeds 100, it is overwrited from an old history.
- - INR-HJ5235-E
11) Auxiliary screen
, Auxiliary menu
∧,∨: Selection
E
F
・ Change of Date
∧,∨,>>: Change of
Date
Save
Cancel
・ Change of hour
∧,∨,>>:Change of
Date and Time
Save
Cancel
Operating : Turn on the control power supplyRunning : Pulse ON 52X : Input power Breaker
Save:DDC→Setting Save in Touch PanelLoading: Touch Panel →Setting Loading in DDCComparison: Data Comparison (Comparison Stop at the point of different data and comparison restart-up with FUNC/DATA keys)
・ Save screen
・ Loading Screen
・ Comparison screen
・ Displaying Software
type
・ Date and Hour of
Software preparation
G
H
12) Auto tuning゙
∧,∨: Selection
For testing in our factory
Change diagram on the Touch Panel Display Screen (4/5)
Start-upBreaking
3-7
③ Utilization
・Displaying
52X On Time
- - INR-HJ5235-E
⑦ Indication test
・Test patterns
display
For testing in our factory
G
H
⑥ Liquid crystal
adjustment
・ The present
concentration
indication
・ Liquid crystal
concentration change
screen
∧、∨ Data change
Cancel
Save
⑧ Automatic testing
・ No. indication
∧,∨: Selection
Change diagram on the Touch Panel Display Screen (5/5)
For testing in our factory
For testing in our factory
⑨ Maintenance
・Indication
3-8
- - INR-HJ5235-E
3-6-1 Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel (1)
Menu screenM01 セッテイM02 DIOM03 AIOM04 ACTIAL VAL∧,∨:Selection of M01to M12
Monitor screenInitial screen
Setting Classification
Screen
Setting Classification Screen
JUMP FRQ.VOLT.SETTINGFLUX BOOST∧,∨: Setting Classification selection
Setting list screen001 COMMERICAL002 RATED003 BASE004 MAXIMUM∧,∨: Setting No. selection
Touch Panel Menu Screen
Move the inverse line using ∧,∨keys to MO1 setting, andPress FUNC/DATA key.
Setting List Screen
Key operationScreen Name Screen example: LCD screen
Press PRG key on an optional screenOptional screen
Press FUNC/DATA key on monitor screen.
Move the inverse line using ∧,∨keys, andselect setting classification,then, press FUNC/DATA key.
Move the inverse line using ∧,∨keys, and after selecting a line which you need change, press FUNC/DATA key.
Continue into next page・・・
Setting classification is shown in setting details (page of 4-13)This screen is used only for heading up the setting No. list on next screen indication. Therefore, no problem when you go to next screen, if necessary.
Monitor screenF* 0.0 HzF* A 0.0 HzIDET 0.0 AVEST 0 V∧,∨:Switching monitor 1/2, 2/2
Optional screen
3-6 Explanation Example of Operation on Touch Panel
003 BASE
FRQ. SETTING
M01 SET DATA
3-9
- - INR-HJ5235-E
003 BASEFREQUENCY
0.1~ 120.0 XXX.X Hz
Setting Data Indication screen
Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel (1) continued from the previous page
Key operationScreen Name Screen example: LCD screen
Press FUNC/DATA key to go into Change screen.
When you refer the setting data, you complete here.
Setting Date Change screen
As one place of LCD become inversed, Change data using ∧,∨ key, and SHIFT key. (No changeable other than setting range)
Inversing place moves with SHIFT key. With ∧ key, inverse digit increases by one. With ∨ key, inverse digit decreases by one.
Save
Note: When you know the setting number to change previously, you can easily operate by directly jumping to setting (indication) number in next page (2).
Press FUNC/DATA key to save data changes.Press RESET key to cancel change, if necessary.
Cancel
When change of data, When pressing ∧ key in case that the relevant place is 9, the upper place increases by 1 and the relevant place become 0. When pressing ∨ key in case that the relevant place is 0, the upper place decreases by 1 and the relevant place become 9.
3-10
003 BASEFREQUENCY
0.1~ 120.0 XXX.■ Hz
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel (2), Direct Jump, continued from the previous page
Key operationScreen Name
Screen example: Upper side shows LED indication Lower side shows LCD screen
Keep to press PRG key for 2 seconds or more on an optional screen.
Optional screen Optional Screen
Monitor ScreenF* 0.0 HzF* A 0.0 HzIDET 0.0 AVEST 0 V∧,∨:Data change
"0" 0 0
Monitor screen
As 7 segments LED flicking, change 7 segments LED to setting number desirable using ∧, ∨ and SHIFT keys. (It is possible to change from 0 to 999)
Flicking digit moves with SHIFT key.Flicking digit increases by one using ∧ key.Flicking digit decreases by one using ∨ key.
2 seconds or more
Monitor ScreenF* 0.0 HzF* A 0.0 HzIDET 0.0 AVEST 0 V∧,∨:Data change
0 0"3"
Monitor screen
Setting Data Indication screen
Setting Data Change screen
(One digit of LCDflicking)
After changing 7 segments LEDs to the setting number desirable, press FUNC/DATA key to jump to the setting data indication screen.(Jumping is invalid if the number can not be indicated )
Note: It is possible to jump to any screen allocated with indication number other than setting .
Press FUNC/DATA key to move Setting Change Mode.
When you refer the setting data, you complete here.
As data on LCD flick, change data using ∧ and ∨ keys and SHIFT key.
Move flicking digit with SHIFT key.With ∧ key, flicking digit increases by one.With ∨ key, flicking digit decreases by one.
Press FUNC/DATA key to save change.
Save
Cancel
One digit of LED flicking
One digit of LED flicking
0 . 0
0 . 0
0 . 0
3-11
003 BASEFREQUENCY
0.1 ~ 120.0 XXX.X Hz
003 BASEFREQUENCY
0.1~ 120.0 XXX.■ Hz
- - INR-HJ5235-E
3-6-2 Operation from Touch Panel
Monitor ScreenF* 0.0 HzF* A 0.0 HzIDET 0.0 AVEST 0 V∧,∨:Switching monitor 1/2,2/2
Menu ScreenM05 TRANSMIT.
M07 CONDITIONM08 FAULT LIST∧,∨: Selection of M01 to M12
Monitor screen
Menu screen
Move the inverse line using ∧ and ∨keys to M06 RUN/STOP screen and press FUNC/DATA key.
Key operationScreen Name
Screen example: Upper side shows LED indication Lower side shows LCD screen
Press PRG key on an optional screen and press FUNC/DATA key on monitor screen.
Operation ScreenSTART O.K.F* 0.0 HzF* A 0.0 HzIDET 0.0 A
Operation monitor screen
Check the indication of START O.K., andPress FUNC/DATA key.
When START N.G. is displayed, see start-up condition in No.380 and clear the impossible condition.
Press ∧,∨ and >> keys, change LED indication to desirable revolution number.
For Forward revolution Drive : Press FWD key.For Reverse revolution Drive : Press REV key.
Operation ScreenRUNNINGF* 50.0 HzF* A 50.0 HzIDET 30.0 A
Operation monitor screen
Operation Monitor screenPress STOP key, if desirable to stop.
0 . 0
0 . 0
0 . 0
0 "5" 0 .0
5 0 .0
Forward
Reverse
Operation monitor screen
M06 RUN/STOP
3-12
Operation ScreenSTART O.K.F* 0.0 HzF* A 0.0 HzIDET 0.0 A
- - INR-HJ5235-E
3-6-3 Referring to Fault Codes on Touch Panel when faults have occurred.
Fault screenFAULT TIME
2006-04-0511:12:13
NUMBER 2
Display No.Fault code Abbr.901 48 PWRL902 31 LINK
Initial screen when Fault occurring
Faults List Screen List for fault code and abbreviation in history is indicated.Using ∧ and ∨ key, select the fault to see details. When numerical quantity of simultaneous fault is 5 or more, scroll to next screen using ∧ and ∨ key.
Key operationScreen Name
Screen example: Upper side shows LED indication Lower side shows LCD screen
Turn an optional screen to fault screen by self-action due to occurrence of a fault. Moving to lower screen by one using FUNC/DATA key.
Press RESET key when resetting faults. If fault causes have cleared, reset is carried out and Err. light out.
Note: If the time of the clock shifts, fault occurrence date also shifts.
902 No.02CODE 31 LINKOPTICAL LINKERROR
Fault has occurred on an optional screen.
Err. Flicking
Err. Flicking
To watch after reset,Press FUNC/DATA key on monitor screen and select M08 fault cause.And then press FUNC/DATA key.
( Err. LED is no flicking)
Err. Light out
E r r .
E r r .
E r r .
Fault code, abbreviation and name are displayed.
When you reset the fault, it is possible to reset it on the fault screen (the top screen) after removing fault causes. Therefore, press RESET key twice to move the top screen, and moreover, press RESET key to reset the fault.
902 31 LINK
3-13
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-1
4-1List of Control Parameter Setting (No.1 to No.379) A set parameter has something with cannot the change and set (display) a condition during the operation. It describes in the table below. Setting which cannot be changed during operation ‥‥ It is × in the update column at the operation. Setting which synchronizes with a certain setting and becomes possible change ‥‥ It is setting No. and a condition value in the setting condition column which can be set.
Chapter 4 Setting data
Setting Data List (1/12)
1 50 , 60
2 0.1 to 200.0
3 0.1 to 200.0
4
0.1 to 200.05
0.1 to 200.06
0.10 to 99.997
0.0 to 200.08
0.1 to 200.09
0.1 to 200.010
0 to 211
12
0 to 313
0.1 to 200.014
0.1 to 200.015
0.1 to 200.016
0.0 to 10.017
0.0 to 2.018
100 to 999919
0.0 to 100.020
0.1 to 200.021
0.0 to 100.022
0.0 to 100.023
0.0 to 400.024
0 to 999925
0.00 to 20.0026
27
28 0 to 2
29 0.1 to 5500.0
30 0.1 to 5500.0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
points
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
V
%
Hz
%
%
%
ms
%
s
s
No.13≧1
No.13≧2
No.13≧3
No.13≧1
Commercial frequency
Rated frequency
Base frequency
Startup frequency
Shutdown frequency
Minimum frequency
Bias frequency
Forward rotation inching frequency
逆転寸動周波数
Rotating direction selecting
Spare
Jumping number of resonance point
Jumping frequency 1
ジャンプ周波数2
ジャンプ周波数3
Jumping width
Jumping width 2
Rated output voltage
Output voltage square reducing ratio
Magnetic flux boosting frequency
Magnetic flux boosting amount
Weaking magnetic flux boosting amount
Startup magnetic flux boosting time constant
Magnetic flux setting filter initial value
Spare
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 T1
Acceleration/deceleration time 2 T2
100% frequency
Correspond to rated slip
Commercial jumping width
0.1 to 200.0 ×HzOperating maximum frequency
Reverse rotation inching frequency
Jumping frequency 2
Jumping frequency 3
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
Startup magnetic flux boosting amount
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-2
Setting Data List (2/12)
34 0.1 to 5500.0
35 0.1 to 200.0
36 0.1 to 200.0
37 0.1 to 200.0
38 0.1 to 200.0
39 0.1 to 5500.0
40 0.1 to 5500.0
41 0.00 to 10.00
42
43
44 0 to 1
45 0.1 to 5500.0
46 0.1 to 5500.0
47 0.1 to 5500.0
48 0.1 to 5500.0
49 0.1 to 5500.0
50 0.1 to 5500.0
51 0.1 to 200.0
52 0.1 to 200.0
53 0.1 to 200.0
54 0.1 to 200.0
55
56 0 to 1
60 0.1 to 200.0
61 0.1 to 200.0
62 0.1 to 200.0
63 0.1 to 200.0
s
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
×
×
64 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
59 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
58 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
57 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
No.28≧1
No.28≧1
No.28≧1
No.28≧1
No.28≧1
No.28=0
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
33 0.1 to 5500.0 s No.28≧1
0: disable, 1: enable
0: not selected, 1: selected
Acceleration/deceleration time 6 T6
Broken point frequency 1 F1
Broken point frequency 2 F2
Broken point frequency 3 F3
Broken point frequency 4 F4
Abrupt deceleration time
Deceleration time for synchronization
S type Acceleration/deceleration time
Spare
Spare
Acceleration/deceleration switching enable
Acceleration/deceleration time 7 T7
Acceleration/deceleration time 8 T8
Acceleration/deceleration time 9 T9
Acceleration/deceleration time 10 T10
Acceleration/deceleration time 11 T11
Acceleration/deceleration time 12 T12
Broken point frequency 5 F5
Broken point frequency 6 F6
Broken point frequency 7 F7
Broken point frequency 8 F8
Spare
Multistage frequency selecting
Forward rotation frequency 5
Forward rotation frequency 6
Forward rotation frequency 7
Forward rotation frequency 8
Reverse rotation frequency 2
Forward rotation frequency 4
Forward rotation frequency 3
Forward rotation frequency 2
Acceleration/deceleration time 5 T5
31 0.1 to 5500.0 s
32 0.1 to 5500.0 s
Acceleration/deceleration time 3 T3
Acceleration/deceleration time 4 T4
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-3
Setting Data List (3/12)
67 0.1 to 200.0
68 0.1 to 200.0
69 0.1 to 200.0
70 0.1 to 200.0
71 0.00 to 1.00
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
94
95
96
97
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
s
98
93
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1 Wait for DI switching time
Reverse rotation frequency 5
Reverse rotation frequency 6
Reverse rotation frequency 7
Reverse rotation frequency 8
Command matching timer
0 to 4
0 to 1
0.0 to 999.9
10.0 to 999.9
-100.0 to 100.0
0 to 2
0.0 to 999.9
ms
%
%
ms
×
×
×
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
No.73≧2
No.73≧2
10.0 to 999.9
-100.0 to 100.0
0 to 2
0.0 to 999.9
10.0 to 999.9
-100.0 to 100.0
0.1 to 200.0
0.0 to 110.0
0.0 to 110.0
0 to 2
0.1 to 100.0
%
%
ms
%
%
Hz
%
%
%
×
×
No.73≧2
No.73≧2
No.73≧4
No.73≧4
No.73≧4
No.73≧4
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
None/1ch/2ch/1,2ch/2,3ch
0: None,1: Light fault2 (keep), 2:Heavy fault2
Spare
AI frequency command selecting
AI frequency command 1 operation selecting AI frequency command 1 filter time constant
AI frequency command 1 gain
AI frequency command 1 offset
AI frequency command 2 operation settingAI frequency command 2 filter time constant
AI frequency command 2 gain
AI frequency command 2 offset
AI frequency command 3 operation selectingAI frequency command 3 filter time constant
AI frequency command 3 gain
AI frequency command 3 offset
AI frequency command dead zone
AI frequency command restriction+
AI frequency command restriction-
AI frequency command operation selecting at abnormalAI frequency command abnormal detecting level
Spare
1 to 16
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
0.1 to 999.9
2 to 9999
order
ms
ms
ms
%
ms If setting 9999ms, P-amp will operate.
Order of frequency setting filter
Frequency setting filter time constant
Magnetic flux setting filter time constant
AVR command filter time constant
Spare
AVR regulator proportional band
AVR regulator integration time
65 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
66 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
No.56=1
No.56=1
Reverse rotation frequency 3
Reverse rotation frequency 4
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-4
Setting Data List (4/12)
0 to 1
0.00 to 99.99
0.0 to 100.0
s
%
×
No.121=1
No.121=1
0.0 to 100.0
0.00 to 20.00
0.00 to 20.00
10.0 to 200.0
0 to 2
%
%
%
%
×
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
DC braking selection
DC braking timer
DC braking current value
Spare
Spare
Spare
Reactive current command gain
Primary resistor compensation gain
ON delay compensation
Motor current ratio
ACR expansion selection
0.0 to 399.9
0.0 to 399.9
0.0 to 999.9
80.0 to 120.0
0.0 to 100.0
%
%
ms
%
%
0.1 to 999.9
2 to 9999
0.00 to 5.00
0.60 to 99.99
2.00 to 99.99
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
%
ms
%
s
s
ms
ms
0 to 9999 ms
for motor rating
for motor rating
Active current limitation2 (braking)
Output current limitation
Output voltage detection compensation filter time constantOutput voltage detection compensation gainOutput voltage detection compensation switching frequency
Spare
Current limitation regulator proportional bandCurrent limitation regulator integration timeCurrent limitation regulator output limitation
Spare
Spare
Voltage 0 detection delay timer
Charge check timer
SS ON delay timer
AVR ON delay timer
AVR OFF delay timer
Spare
0: None, 1: Select2: Simple sensor-less vector control disable
101 0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingActive current limitation2 (driving)
99
100
0.0 to 399.9
0.0 to 399.9
%
%
for motor rating
for motor rating
Active current limitation (driving)
Active current limitation (braking)
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
Spare
Spare
0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingOutput current limitation(drawing)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Data List (5/12)
4-5
135 12.6 to 999.9
136 1.0 to 999.9
137 0.0 to 160.0
138 12.6 to 999.9
139 0.0 to 399.9
140 12.6 to 999.9
141 0.0 to 160.0
142 12.6 to 999.9
143 12.6 to 999.9
144 0.0 to 160.0
145 5.0 to 120.0
146 0.0 to 120.0
147 500 to 9000
148 0.0 to 100.0
149 0.0 to 100.0
150
151
152
153
154
0000 to 1111
155
0000 to 1111
156
0000 to 1101
157
0000 to 0123
158
0000 to 1111
159
0000 to 1110
160
161
162
163
164
165
%
ms
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Hz
%
%
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
166
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
Active current regulator proportional bandActive current regulator integration timeActive current regulator output restrictionReactive current regulator proportional bandReactive current regulator proportional limitationMotor axis compensation regulator proportional bandMotor axis compensation regulator output limitationActive current limitation regulator proportional bandAxis compensation regulator proportional bandAxis compensation regulator restriction
Slip restriction
λrestriction
Carrier frequency
Lσ compensation factor
PWM modulation switching voltage
Spare
Software SW1
Software SW2
Software SW3
Software SW4
Software SW5
Software SW6
Spare
1 to 16
200 to 11000
0 to 3
kVA
×
×
×
for 6.6kV: 10Inverter multiplex order
Inverter rating capacity
Cell rating voltage selection
00 to 11 ×Cell software SW1
0.00 to 10.00 % No.132≧2Voltage boosting amount
0.1 to 200.0 Hz No.132≧2Voltage boosting frequency
0.0 to 999.9 ms No.132≧2Reactive current detecting HPF filter time constant
0.0 to 200.0 % No.132≧2Reactive current restriction level
12.6 to 999.9 % No.132≧2Reactive current restriction regulator proportional band
0.0 to 110.0
0.00 to 99.99
%
ms
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
133
134
Output voltage compensation gain
Current command filter time constant
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-6
Setting Data List (6/12)
0 to 1
1100 to 3343
1000 to 4000
1.0 to 99.9
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 400.0
0.1 to 60.0
0 to 99
1 to 800
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 1
12.6 to 999.9
1.0 to 999.9
0.1 to 200.0
0 to 3
0 to 9999
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
s
Hz
%
s
Station
Word
%
ms
Hz
%
%
×
×
×
×
×
×
No.172=1
No.172=1
No.172=1
No.172=1
No.172=1
No.172=1
DSM card mounted
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
167
0: None, 1: Select
D-Line: 1 to 7, T-Link: 0 to 99D-Line: 1 to 63, T-Link: 400 or 800
Fault expansion selection
Fault level selection 1
Fault level selection 2
Middle fault shutdown timer
Startup hang-up detection frequency
Startup hang-up detection current level
Startup hang-up detection time period
Spare
DSM slave address
DSM received data quantity
Internal send data selection 1
Internal send data selection 2
Internal send data selection 3
Internal send bit selection 1
Internal send bit selection 2
Internal send bit selection 3
Action selection at transfer error
Active current regulator for speed search proportional bandActive current regulator for speed search integration timeForward/reverse revolution decision frequency
Action at speed search abnormal
Retry restriction for speed search
Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (+side)Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (-side)
Spare
0 to 1 ×Setting selection for testing Cleared to "0" at control power supply "off"
0 to 1
10.0 to 399.9
11.0 to 400.0
%
%
10.0 to 999.9 s
1: ProtectProtection for setting data
Spare
Motor overload continuous rating
Motor overload setting current
Motor overload detecting time period
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
0.1 to 5500.0
0.1 to 5500.0
s
s
Transmission inching acceleration time
Transmission inching deceleration time
Spare
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Data List (7/12)
0.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 999.9
12.6 to 999.9
1.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 399.9
12.6 to 999.9
1.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 399.9
12.6 to 999.9
1.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 399.9
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 30.0
0.0 to 999.9
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
%
ms
%
%
ms
%
%
ms
%
%
s
%
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
227
229
231
232
233
226
228
230
201
Test expansion level 1
Test expansion level 2
R1 tuning reactive current regulator proportional bandR1 tuning reactive current regulator integration timeR1 tuning reactive current regulator limitationR1 tuning active current regulator proportional bandR1 tuning active current regulator integration timeR1 tuning active current regulator limitationReactive current tuning regulator proportional bandReactive current tuning regulator integration timeReactive current tuning regulator limitationReactive current tuning starting conditionReactive current tuning start delay timerReactive current tuning pass/fail distinction level
AO data 1 (internal)
AO data 2 (internal)
AO data 3 (internal)
AO data 4 (internal)
AO data 5 (external)
AO data 6 (external)
AO data 7 (external)
AO data 8 (external)
4-7
0.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 999.9
No.200=1
No.200=1
Test expansion level 3
Test expansion level 4
0.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 999.9
No.200=1
No.200=1
Test expansion level 5
Test expansion level 6
0.0 to 999.9 No.200=1Test expansion level 7
Spare
00 to 11
00 to 11
0 to 6
-400.0 to 400.0 %
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
For automatic test 1
For automatic test 2
Signal selection for testing
Data for testing
-/-/ Pt Auto. test/Voltage generated
-/-/ Operation time clear/Fault clear
0 to 1 ×AO expansion data 0: None, 1: Select
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Data List (8/12)
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
1 to 12
0 to 1
0 to 1
times
%
times
%
times
%
times
%
times
%
times
%
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
Default value: 1
0: None, 1: Select
Default value:8(Poff)
Default value:2 (Fwd)Default value:3 (Rev)Default value:4 (FTA)Default value:5 (FTB)Default value:7 (ERST)Default value:11 (AISEL)Default value:12 (AIC)Default value:15 (JOG)
AO data 3 gain (internal)
AO data 3 offsets (internal)
AO data 4 gain (internal)
AO data 4 offset (internal)
AO data 5gain (external)
AO data 5 offset (external)
AO data 6 gain (external)
AO data 6 offset (external)
AO data 7 gain (external)
AO data 7 offset (external)
AO data 8 gain (external)
AO data 8 offset (external)
AO cell temperature selection
Spare
DIO expansion setting
DI X1 function selection
DI X2 function selection
DI X3 function selection
DI X4 function selection
DI X5 function selection
DI X6 function selection
DI X7 function selection
DI X8 function selection
DI X9 function selection
DO FTH function selection
DO Y1 function selection
DO Y2 function selection
DO Y3 function selection
4-8
0 to 1
0.01 to 10.00 s
×DIFANH function Normal open/close
DIFANHL detection timer
-99.99 to 99.99
-400.0 to 400.0
times
%
-400.0 to 400.0
times
%
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
AO data 1 gain (internal)
AO data 1 offset (internal)
AO data 2 gain (internal)
AO data 2 offset (internal)
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
デフォルト値1倍
デフォルト値0%
Default value:3 (SS)
Default value:13 (RSTX)
Default value: 1
Default value: 0%
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Data List (9/12)
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 200.0
0 to 3
0.00 to 99.99
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 5500.0
200 to 1860
0.60 to 99.99
0.00 to 99.99
0.1 to 10.0
0 to 1
50.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 150.0
0.00 to 99.99
0.00 to 99.99
75.0 to 125.0
0 to 1
Hz
Hz
s
Hz
s
V
s
s
s
%
%
s
s
%
×
×
×
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.284≧2
No.284≧2
No.284≧2
No.293=1
No.293=1
No.293=1
No.293=1
No.293=1
No.293=1
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
0: heavy fault1, 1: pulse off, 2: continue ope.1, 3: continue ope.2
0: None, 1: Detect
0: Normal, 1: Sync. operation parallel off
Attained frequency level lower limit
Attained frequency level upper limit
Action selection at power interruption
Operation continuing timer for instantaneous power interruptionLowest frequency at power interruptionDeceleration time at power interruptionOVL voltage level at power interruptionRestart delay timer at power interruption
Detection timer for power failure
Magnetic flux command calculation time at restart after instantaneous power interruption
Spare
Line voltage detection switching
Line voltage detection compensation gainLine voltage interruption detection levelOperation continuing timer for control power interruptionDetection timer for control power failureCompensation for cell DC voltage regulation
Spare
Spare
Synchronous switchover between line and inverter selection
4-9
0 to 9999 s No.255=1Input circuit breaker answerback output OFF delay timer
0 to 1 × No.255=1DI operation command input switching
0 to 3 No.255=1Power supply normal output selection
1 to 1000 ms No.255=1Power supply normal output ON delay timer
299
300
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
×
×
×
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
DO Y4 function selection
DO Y5 function selection
DO Y6 function selection
Default:21 (Lower limit of frequency )
Default:22 (Upper limit of frequency )
Default:12 (TST )
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 3 ×Mask selection at power failure of DIFANHL
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
0.0 to 150.0 % No.293=1Line voltage interruption detection level 2
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Data List (10/12)
-65.0 to 65.0
0.1 to 60.0
5.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 50.0
5.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 50.0
13 to 9999
13 to 9999
13 to 9999
50.0 to 150.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
%
s
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
DIO card
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
SW=DIOA limited
PLL reactive voltage command
PLL reactive voltage command calculation timePLL reactive voltage compensation regulator proportional bandPLL reactive voltage compensation regulator output limitationPLL reactive voltage compensation regulator2 proportional bandPLL reactive voltage compensation regulator2 output limitationSynchronous active current regulator proportional band
Synchronous motor axis compensation regulator proportional band Synchronous magnetic flux compensationSlip reduction rate at synchronous operation
Output reactor %X
Spare
DI X11 function selection (DIO card)
DI X12 function selection (DIO card)
DI X13 function selection (DIO card)
DI X14 function selection (DIO card)
Spare
4-10
0.01 to 60.00
0.50 to 99.99
Hz
s
No.300=1
No.300=1
PLL output scale
PLL operation start delay timer
0 to 2
10.0 to 999.9 %
×
No.332≧1
0: PID off, 1: PID frequency command, 2:PID freq. add.
PID operation selection
PID proportional band
331
332
333
250 to 9999
1 to 9999
0.0 to 399.9
%
ms
%
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
PLL regulator proportional band
PLL regulator integration time
PLL regulator limitation
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 163
0 to 199
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Data List (11/12)
0 to 9999
0.0 to 120.0
0 to 4
0 to 1
-100.0 to 100.0
0 to 1
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 200.0
100 to 9999
0 to 9999
0.1 to 200.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 400.0
0 to 9999
0.1 to 999.9
2 to 9999
0.0 to 399.9
10.0 to 399.9
11.0 to 400.0
10.0 to 999.9
ms
%
%
Hz
Hz
V
ms
Hz
%
%
%
ms
%
%
%
ms
%
%
%
s
×
×
×
×
×
10.0 to 200.0 %
%
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
% No.343=1
PID output filter time constant
PID limitation
PID command selection
PID FB selection
Touch panel PID command
Motor 2 setting enable
Motor 2 rating frequency
Motor 2 base frequency
Motor 2 output rating voltage
Motor 2 magnetic flux setting filter time constantMotor 2 magnetic flux boosting frequencyMotor 2 magnetic flux boosting amountMotor 2 attenuating magnetic flux boosting amountMotor 2 starting magnetic flux boosting amountMotor 2 starting magnetic flux boosting time constantMotor 2 magnetic flux setting filter initial value
Motor 2 AVR regulator proportional bandMotor 2 AVR regulator integration time
Motor 2 output current limitation
Motor 2 overload continuous rating
Motor 2 overload setting current
Motor 2 overload detection time period
Motor 2 motor current ratio
Motor 2 primary resistance compensation gain
Motor 2 ON delay compensation
4-11
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.10 to 99.99
%
%
Hz
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
Motor 2 reactive current command gain
Motor 2 Lσ compensation coefficient
Motor 2 lowest frequency
Spare
365
366
0.0 to 3600.0
0.00 to 10.00
0.0 to 60.0
s
s
s
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
PID integration time
PID differential time
PID FB filter time constant
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0.0 to 399.9Motor 2 output current limitation(drawing)
0.00 ~ 20.00
0.00 ~ 20.00
0.00 ~ 20.00
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting Data List (12/12)
367
4-12
Spare
Spare
368
370
371
369
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
No. Item Display range Unit Remarks
999 No-setting item of setting data 1 to 379 Only display
No-setting item of setting data (1/1)
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
Spare
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 400.0
0.1 to 60.0
Hz
%
s
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
0.0 to 100.0 % No.343=1
Motor 2 startup hang-up detection frequencyMotor 2 startup hang-up detection current levelMotor 2 startup hang-up detection time period
Motor 2 output reactor %X
Station address
Operation selection at transmission abnormal(Modbus)
1 to 247
0 to 1
MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
×
×
Responce interval
Transmission stop detection time
Parity bit selection
Transmission speed
0.00 to 1.00
0 to 60
0 to 3
0 to 4MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
s
s
×
×
×
×
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-13
Description of Setting Item List (1/60)
Specify commercial frequency. This is used for calculating humping frequency etc.
Specify motor rating frequency. This value corresponds to 100% output frequency.Adjust to the specification of the equipment or motor to drive.If specify settings beyond the specification of the equipment or motor to drive, the equipment or motor is afraid to be damaged.
If magnetic field weaking control is required, specify magnetic field weaking starting frequency.If magnetic field weaking control is not required, specify the same value as the rated frequency.
Adjust to the specification of the motor.If specify settings beyond the specification of the motor, the motor is afraid to bedamaged.
Specify the minimum operation frequency in inverter operation.In case that it is operated using digital signal such as transmission, command value will increase up to this frequency if specifying a value other than "0".
Specify the minimum frequency at inverter shutdown.When shutdown is directed, the equipment will shutdown after the frequency command calculation value decreases up to this setting value.
1 50 , 60
2 0.1 to 200.0
3 0.1 to 200.0
5 0.1 to 200.0
6 0.1 to 200.0
7 0.10 to 99.99
×
×
×
×
×
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Commercial frequency
Rated frequency
Base frequency
Startup frequency
Shutdown frequency
Minimum frequency
100% frequency
Specify the value corresponding to motor rated slip frequency.
No.1 to 11: Setting items on frequency
Touch panel setting class display: "FRQ. SETTING"
Specify the maximum operation frequency in inverter operation.If operation maximum frequency is greater than setting No.2 rated frequency, specify the operation maximum frequency to the same value as the rated frequency.
4 0.1 to 200.0 ×HzOperating maximum frequency
4-2 List of Detailed Control Parameter Setting (No.1 to 379)
CAUTION
CAUTION
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (2/60)
4-14
This determines the minimum operation frequency in low speed area. Operation method differs depending on setting No.11 Rotating direction selecting and setting No.165-3 Ai frequency bias switching selection.
Bias frequency setting is determined from frequency command input direction of external operation command "Input" state. Operation distinction depends on No.86 in case of analog frequency command, but bias frequency operation is started by specifying a value other than "0" in case of the other operation.
0No.86 (Analog dead zone)
No.86 (Analog dead zone)
External frequency command
Speed calculator input(Internal frequency command)
External frequency setting (Forward)
External frequency setting (Reverse)
Frequency setting (Forward)
Frequency setting (Reverse)
Internal frequency command
Internal frequency command
0
0
Internal frequency command
Ai frequency commandDi frequency command
Ai frequency commandDi frequency command
Ai frequency commandDi frequency command
8 0.0 to 200.0 ×HzBias frequency
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (3/60)
4-15
Bias frequency setting is determined from frequency command input direction of external operation command "Input" state. Operation distinction depends on No.86 in case of analog frequency command, but bias frequency operation is started by specifying a value other than "0" in case of the other operation.
0
No.86 (Analog dead zone)
No.86 (Analog dead zone)
External frequency command
Speed calculator input(Internal frequency command)
Internal frequency command
Ai frequency commandDi frequency command
Frequency setting (Forward)
Internal frequency command
0
Ai frequency commandDi frequency command
Frequency setting (Reverse)
Internal frequency command
0 Ai frequency commandDi frequency command
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Specify a frequency corresponding to inching signal (FJ, RJ) via transmission from MICREX.In case of operating in DI mode, the frequency setting becomes the value corresponding to DI<No.2: FWD>, <No.3: REV>input. Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.
Description of Setting Item List (4/60)
4-16
9 0.1 to 200.0
10 0.1 to 200.0
Hz
Hz
Forward rotation inching frequency
Reverse rotation inching frequency
11 0 to 2 ×Rotation direction selecting
Specify the rotating direction of analog frequency command operation, DI up/down operation mode, touch panel operation and PID operation (except transmission operation).
Setting = 0: Both Forward and Reverse rotation is enabledSetting = 1: Forward rotation onlySetting = 2: Reverse rotation only
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-17
Description of Setting Item List (5/60)
External operation command
DI function selection <No.2: FWD>
DI frequency command Forward
Reverse
External operation command
DI frequency command Forward
Reverse
External operation command
DI frequency command Forward
Reverse
-100%
Frequency command is restricted with "0" and don't rotate in reverse.
DI function selection <No.2: FWD>
DI function selection <No.2: FWD>
DI function selection <No.3: REV>
DI function selection <No.3: REV>
DI function selection <No.3: REV>
Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-18
Description of Setting Item List (6/60)
External operation command
DI function selection <No.2: FWD>
DI frequency command HLR output
Forward
Reverse
External operation command
DI frequency command Forward
Reverse
External operation command
DI frequency command Forward
Reverse
-100%
Frequency command is restricted with "0" and doesn't rotate in reverse.
DI frequency command Forward
Reverse
100%Set HLR output
Set HLR output
"0" at stop
DI frequency command HLR output
Forward
Reverse
Set HLR output
-100%
100%
Reverse
ForwardDI frequency command HLR output
DI function selection <No.2: FWD>
DI function selection <No.2: FWD>
DI function selection <No.3: REV>
DI function selection <No.3: REV>
DI function selection <No.3: REV>
Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Specify jumping number to avoid mechanical resonant operation.Up to 3 points of setting is possible. Jumping in commercial frequency is always executed regardless the setting value. If this setting is "0", items from No.14 to 17 are not displayed on touch panel and dedicated loader and cannot be referred or updated.
Specify jumping frequency to avoid mechanical resonant operation.Setting is possible depending on the point number specified in setting No.13.
Specify jumping width of resonance point jumping.All the three jumping width is in common.
0Output frequency setting
Output frequency command
Resonance point jumping 1
Resonance point jumping 2
Resonance point jumping 3
Jumping width
If resonance jumping is specified, the operation is restricted as above when frequency setting value is within resonance point, but output frequency command varies continuously via speed calculator and the equipment operates at another point out of resonance point. (If acceleration/deceleration time is set as short time value, the output frequency command will also change abruptly.) Both forward and reverse rotation jump at the same frequency point.
Other than above, jumping operation of setting No.18 jumping width 2 corresponding to a half frequency of the commercial frequency is executed.
13 0 to 3
14 0.1 to 200.0
15 0.1 to 200.0
16 0.1 to 200.0
17 0.0 to 10.0
18 0.0 to 2.0
×points
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
No.12≧1
No.12≧2
No.12≧3
No.12≧1
Jumping number of resonance point
Jumping frequency 1
Jumping frequency 2
Jumping frequency 3
Jumping width
Jumping width 2Commercial jumping width
Specify the jumping width as that of a half of the commercial frequency.
Description of Setting Item List (7/60)
No.13 to 18: Setting items on jumping frequency
Touch panel setting class display: "JUMP FRQ."
Jumping frequency 1
Jumping frequency 2
Jumping frequency 3
4-19
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (8/60)
19 100 to 9999
20 0.0 to 100.0
V
%
Rated output voltage
Output voltage square reducing ratio
This item is to specify rated voltage for output. This value means 100% output voltage. Adjustt this value to motor specification.If a setting beyond the motor specification is specified, the motor may be damaged.
This setting item is to attenuate magnetic flux command comparing the basic V/F pattern. Higher efficiency operation of the motor is possible depending the motor loading condition by setting this function.
Output frequency command
Output voltage command
Base frequency Rated frequency
Square reducing pattern is acquired by specifying the setting value as 100%.
Proportional pattern is acquired by specifying the setting value as 0%.
No.19 to 20: Setting items on voltage
Touch panel setting class display: "VOLT.SETTING"
4-20
CAUTION
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
25 0 to 9999 msStartup magnetic flux boosting time constant
This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command at startup comparing the basic V/F pattern. This corresponds to forcing at startup, and is used together with setting No.24.
Base frequency Rated frequency
100%
Magnetic flux command pattern
0
Depress magnetic flux boosting
Magnetic flux boosting
Startup magnetic flux boostingMagnetic flux command
No.22
26 0.00 to 20.00 %Magnetic flux setting filter initial value
Specify magnetic flux setting filter initial value.
Description of Setting Item List (9/60)
4-21
21 0.1 to 200.0
22 0.0 to 100.0
Hz
%
Magnetic flux boosting frequency
Magnetic flux boosting amount
Specify the frequency when increasing motor output torque. Input a frequency up to base frequency.When output frequency is "0", torque in low speed area is intensified by adding attenuation amount to become "0" to basic magnetic flux command from boosting amount of setting No.22.
This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command comparing the basic V/F pattern. Magnetic flux in low speed area is intensified by using magnetic flux boosting frequency setting together.
No.21 to 26: Setting items on magnetic flux boosting
Touch panel setting class display: "FLUX BOOST"
23 0.0 to 100.0
24 0.0 to 400.0
%
%
Weaking magnetic flux boosting amount
Startup magnetic flux boosting amount
This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command in operation with weaking magnetic flux comparing the basic V/F pattern.
This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command at startup comparing the basic V/F pattern. This corresponds to forcing at startup.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (10/60)
28 0 to 2
29 0.1 to 5500.0
30 0.1 to 5500.0
31 0.1 to 5500.0
×
s
s
s
32 0.1 to 5500.0 s
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
Acceleration/deceleration 1 T1
Acceleration/deceleration time 2 T2
Acceleration/deceleration time 3 T3
Acceleration/deceleration time 4 T4
These setting items are to specify patterns for acceleration/deceleration time. It is possible to select patterns for speed adjusting from No.28 to No.32 by selecting a pattern from 0 to 2. (Refer pages 24 to 25 for the detail.)
34 0.1 to 5500.0 s No.28≧1
33 0.1 to 5500.0 s No.28≧1
Acceleration/deceleration time 6 T7
Acceleration/deceleration time 5 T5
35 0.1 to 200.0
36 0.1 to 200.0
37 0.1 to 200.0
38 0.1 to 200.0
39 0.1 to 5500.0
40 0.1 to 5500.0
41 0.00 to 10.00
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
s
s
s
No.28≧1
No.28≧1
No.28≧1
No.28≧1
No.28=0
Broken point frequency 1 F1
Broken point frequency 2 F2
Broken point frequency 3 F3
Broken point frequency 4 F4
Abrupt deceleration time
Deceleration time for synchronization
S type Acceleration/deceleration time
These setting items are to specify values when setting No.28 acceleration/deceleration pattern is set as 1 or 2.
If DI<No.1: SYX (Emergency stop) from relay unit is OFF, or operation command SY1 of transfer bit command is OFF when cooperating with MICREX, speed is decreased based on the time specified in this item. Specify a time to decrease speed from rated frequency to "0". If <No.1: SYX> is not selected for function selection setting (No.256 to 264, or 319 to 322 of DI X1to X9, or X11 to X14, SYX is treated as same as ON input.
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time up to the frequency designated with setting No.1 (commercial frequency), in case that DI <No.31: CPS (switching input to commercial power) or <No.28: SYB (synchronous start command) is ON during operation. Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.
Specify S type time (Ts in Fig. below) in case of executing S type acceleration/deceleration. However, S type acceleration/deceleration is executed only when frequency speed adjusting pattern setting No.28 is "0", and operation executed under <RUN>+<No.2: FWD>, <No.3: REV> of DI up/down in DI notch, or executed from touch panel.
v'
v'/2
Ts
Frequency F
Ts Time T
Ts/2/T1
T1
T1+Ts
Ts: S type time T1: Speed adjusting timeRated
frequency
No.28 to 41: Setting items on speed adjusting
Touch panel setting class display: "ACC./DEC."
4-22
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
44 0 to 1
45 0.1 to 5500.0
46 0.1 to 5500.0
47 0.1 to 5500.0
48 0.1 to 5500.0
49 0.1 to 5500.0
50 0.1 to 5500.0
51 0.1 to 200.0
52 0.1 to 200.0
53 0.1 to 200.0
54 0.1 to 200.0
s
s
s
s
s
s
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
×
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
No.44=1
0: disable, 1: enableAcceleration/deceleration switching enable
Acceleration/deceleration time 7 T7
Acceleration/deceleration time 8 T8
Acceleration/deceleration time 9 T9
Acceleration/deceleration time 10 T10
Acceleration/deceleration time 11 T11
Acceleration/deceleration time 12 T12
Broken point frequency 5 F5
Broken point frequency 6 F6
Broken point frequency 7 F7
Broken point frequency 8 F8
Specify this item to "1" so as to make setting No.45 to 54 settable.If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.45 to 54 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.
These items are used when acceleration/deceleration slant 2 (<No.22: HLR2> in DI) is selected, DI (<No.20: MOT2>) ON, or acceleration/deceleration pattern 2 (setting No.28=2) is selected. (Refer to pages 4-24 to 25 for the detail.)Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.
No.44 to 54: Setting items on speed adjusting 2
Touch panel setting class display: "ACC./DEC. 2"
Description of Setting Item List (11/60)
4-23
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
T1 T2
T3 T4
Usual
Reverse
T7 T8
T9 T10Forward
Reverse
Acceleration/deceleration 2 is selected (Setting No.44=1 and
DI <HLR2>=ON or DI <MOT2>=ON)
T1
UsualForward
T3T2
F1
F2
T4 T5 T6
F3
F4
Symmetrical as for Reverse
Acceleration/deceleration 2 is selected
(Setting No.44=1 and DI <HLR2>=ON or DI <MOT2>=ON) T7
Forward
T9T8
F5
F6
T10 T11 T12
F7
F8
Symmetrical as for Reverse
100% frequency
-100% frequency
100% frequency
-100% frequency
100% frequency
100%frequency
Description of Setting Item List (12/60)
4-24
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Operation at setting No.44=1 T1
Forward
T3T2
F1
F2
T7 T9 T10
F5
F7
Symmetrical as for Reverse
100% frequency
F3F4
T4 T5 T8
F6
*Note: Since T7 to T11 are not defined yet at setting No.44=1, acceleration/deceleration of pattern "0" is performed forcibly.
56 0 to 1 × 0: None, 1: SelectMultistage frequency selecting
Specify this item to "1" so as to make setting No.57 to 71 settable.If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.57 to 71 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated. If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.57 to 71 operate with default.
60 0.1 to 200.0
61 0.1 to 200.0
62 0.1 to 200.0
63 0.1 to 200.0
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
64 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
59 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
58 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
57 0.1 to 200.0 Hz No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
65 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
66 0.1 to 200.0 Hz
No.56=1
No.56=1
Default: 40.0Hz
Default: 50.0Hz
Default: 60.0Hz
Default: 70.0Hz
Default: 10.0Hz
Default: 30.0Hz
Default: 20.0Hz
Default: 10.0Hz
Default: 20.0Hz
Default: 30.0Hz
Forward rotation frequency 5
Forward rotation frequency 6
Forward rotation frequency 7
Forward rotation frequency 8
Reverse rotation frequency 2
Forward rotation frequency 4
Forward rotation frequency 3
Forward rotation frequency 2
Reverse rotation frequency 3
Reverse rotation frequency 4
67 0.1 to 200.0
68 0.1 to 200.0
69 0.1 to 200.0
70 0.1 to 200.0
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
No.56=1
Default: 40.0Hz
Default: 50.0Hz
Default: 60.0Hz
Default: 70.0Hz
Reverse rotation frequency 5
Reverse rotation frequency 6
Reverse rotation frequency 7
Reverse rotation frequency 8
Specify each frequency [Hz], if multistep frequency operation (max. 8 stages) are performed.If setting No.56 is set to "0", items from setting No.57 to 71 cannot be specified and operate with default.
For operating in multistep frequency, forward frequency 1 to 8 and reverse frequency 1 to 0 can be selected by specifying setting No.160=x0xx and No.165=xx0x, and inputting to <RUN> of DI and to <No.2:FWD>, <No.3:REV>, <No.16:MNB1>, <No.17:MNB2> or <No.18:MNB3> of DI. Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.
No.56 to 71: Setting items on multistep notch frequency setting
Touch panel setting class display: "NOTCH FRQ."
Description of Setting Item List (13/60)
T11
F8
4-25
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
71 0.00 to 1.00 s No.56=1 Default: 0.10sCommand matching timer
MNB2
0
0
1
1
MNB2 MNB1 Frequency settingForward inching
frequency 1
Forward freq. 2
Forward freq. 3
Forward freq. 4
Frequency settingReverse inching
frequency 1
Reverse freq. 2
Reverse freq. 3
Reverse freq. 4
MNB1
0
1
0
1
<FWD> + <RUN> + <REV> + <RUN> +
No.
10
64
65
66
No.
9
57
58
59
MNB3 MNB3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Forward freq. 5
Forward freq. 6
Forward freq. 7
Forward freq. 8
Reverse freq. 5
Reverse freq. 6
Reverse freq. 7
Reverse freq. 8
67
68
69
70
60
61
62
63
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Selection of frequency command turns over after settling of command fluctuation in order to prevent ON/OFF switching errors of DI MNB1,2,3.
Description of Setting Item List (14/60)
Frequency setting selection via DI <MNB1>, <MNB2> and <MNB3>
4-26
0 to 4
0 to 1
×
× No.73≧1
73
74
None/1ch/2ch/1,2ch/2,3chAI frequency command selecting
AI frequency command 1 operation selecting
Specify a value one or more into this setting item to make No.74 to 90 settable.If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.74 to 90 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated. If this item is set to "1" to "4", AI to be used is turned over..This setting = 1: Use AI frequency command 1 only, This setting = 2: Use AI frequency command 2 only,This setting = 3: Use AI frequency command 1 and 2, This setting = 4: Use AI frequency command 2 and 3.
Select AI frequency command 1 operation.Input/AI command
This setting = 0: 4 - 20mA / 0 -100%This setting = 1: 4 - 20mA / 100 - 0%
No.73 to 90: Setting items on AI frequency command setting
Touch panel setting class display: "AI-FRQ."
0.0 to 999.9
10.0 to 999.9
ms
%
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
75
76
AI frequency command 1 filter time constant
AI frequency command 1 gain
Specify input filter time constant of AI frequency command 1.
Specify AI frequency command 1 gain. Setting the gain to 100%, the command specifies 4 - 20mA / 0 - 100%.
-100.0 to 100.0 % No.73≧177 AI frequency command 1 offset
Specify offset amount of AI frequency command 1.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (15/60)
4-27
0 to 2
0.0 to 999.9 ms
× No.73≧2
No.73≧2
10.0 to 999.9
-100.0 to 100.0
%
%
No.73≧2
No.73≧2
78
79
80
81
AI frequency command 2 operation setting
AI frequency command 2 filter time constant
AI frequency command 2 gain
AI frequency command 2 offset
Select operation of AI frequency command 2. Input / AI command
This setting = 0: 0 - 10V / 0 - 100%This setting = 1: ±10V / ±100%This setting = 2: 0 - 10V / 100 - 0%
Specify offset of AI frequency command 2.
Specify input filter time constant of AI frequency command 2.
Specify gain of AI frequency command 2. Setting the gain to 100%, the command specifies 10V / 100%.
0 to 2
0.0 to 999.9
10.0 to 999.9
ms
%
× No.73≧4
No.73≧4
No.73≧4
82
83
84
AI frequency command 2 operation setting
AI frequency command 3 filter time constant
AI frequency command 3 gain
Select operation of AI frequency command 3. Input / AI command
This setting = 0: 0 - 10V / 0 - 100%This setting = 1: ±10V / ±100%This setting = 2: 0 - 10V / 100 - 0%
Specify input filter time constant of AI frequency command 3.
Specify gain of AI frequency command 3. Setting the gain to 100%, the command specifies 10V / 100%.
-100.0 to 100.0
0.1 to 200.0
0.0 to 110.0
%
Hz
%
No.73≧4
No.73≧1
No.73≧1
85
86
87
AI frequency command 3 offset
AI frequency command dead zone
AI frequency command restriction+
Specify offset of AI frequency command 3.
Specify dead zone of AI frequency command (output is "0" if this input is equal this setting or less).This setting is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2, and 3.
Specify restriction+ of AI frequency command. This setting is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2, and 3.
0.0 to 110.0 % No.73≧188 AI frequency command restriction-
Specify restriction- of AI frequency command. This setting is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2, and 3.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (16/60)
4-28
0 to 2
0.1 to 100.0 %
× No.73≧1
No.73≧1
89
90
0: None, 1: Light fault2 (keep), 2: Heavy fault2
AI frequency command operation selecting at abnormal
AI frequency command abnormal detecting level
Specify operation of AI frequency command at abnormal. This is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2,3.This setting = 0: No abnormality detectedThis setting = 1: Light fault2 (display only), keeping frequency settingThis setting = 2: Heavy fault2 (stopping pulse off)
Specify AI frequency command abnormal detecting level. This is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2,3.When AI frequency command abnormal detecting level is set to enable (No.89 = 1 or 2) , it is made abnormal if AI frequency command changes beyond this setting value during 10ms.
92 1 to 16
93 0 to 9999
94 0 to 9999
95 0 to 9999
order
ms
ms
ms
Order of frequency setting filter
Frequency setting filter time constant
Magnetic flux setting filter time constant
AVR command filter time constant
Specify the order of frequency setting filter.
Specify frequency setting filter time constant. This is specified in order to decrease shock at the time of changing setting frequency.
Specify a value corresponding to motor magnetic flux alteration.By specifying a value corresponding to motor secondary time constant or larger, control stability is acquired. Specify a larger setting value than that acquired from (L2+Lm)/r2.
Specify filter time constant of AVR command. Intend to stabilize the control by suppressing voltage command fluctuation in weaking magnetic field control operation.
No.92 to 95: Setting items on filter setting
Touch panel setting class display: "FRQ. FILTER"
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (17/60)
97 0.1 to 999.9
98 2 to 9999
99
100
101
102
%
ms
0.0 to 399.9
0.0 to 399.9
0.0 to 399.9
0.0 to 399.9
%
%
%
%
If setting 9999ms, P-amp will operate.
for motor rating
for motor rating
for motor rating
for motor rating
AVR regulator proportional band
AVR regulator integration time
Active current limitation (driving)
Active current limitation (braking)
Active current limitation2 (driving)
Active current limitation2 (braking)
Proportional band of voltage control system: P (%) = x 100%.
Adjust to a optimal value during spot adjusting.
1
Proportional gain
Specify the limitation of inverter output active current for driving side and braking side separately.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value and the calculated value from No.103 (or No.357 if No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1" and DI <No.20: MOT2> is input) and No.128 (Reactive current command gain). Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation = √(No.1032 -No.1282)
Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment
may be damaged.
103 0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingOutput current limitation
The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value, the calculated limitation value from No.128 (Reactive current command gain), and above setting value of No.99, 100, or No.101, 102. Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation = √(No.1032 -No.1282)When DI <No.20: MOT2> is input as No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1", this setting is not used, andNo.357 (Motor2 output current limitation is enabled.
Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification. If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or
equipment may be damaged.
Specify the limitation of inverter output active current for driving side and braking side separately.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value and the calculated value from No.103 (or No.357 if No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1" and DI <No.20: MOT2> is input) and No.128 (Reactive current command gain). Specify a value comparing for motor rating.In order to make this specified current limitation active, input into either of the following:
・input into DI <No.21:LMT2>・input into DI <No.20: MOT2> as No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1".
Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.
If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment may be damaged.
Specify integration time of voltage control system.Adjust to a optimal value during spot adjusting as well as proportional band.
No.97 to 103: Setting items on AVR
Touch panel setting class display: "AVR"
4-29
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (18/60)
4-30
104
105
106
0.0 to 999.9
80.0 to 120.0
0.0 to 100.0
ms
%
%
Output voltage detection compensation filter time constant
Output voltage detection compensation gain
Output voltage detection compensation switching frequency
Specify filter time constant of output voltage detection compensation .
Specify gain compensation of output voltage detection (estimate value).Output voltage decreases in the direction of setting value: "large".Output voltage increases in the direction of setting value: "little".
Specify switching level of output voltage detection (estimate value) used for AVR control.AVR control by motor induced voltage (estimate value) is performed if frequency command is less than this setting value, and AVR control by inverter output detection value (estimated) is performed if frequency command is larger than this setting value.
111
112
113
0.1 to 999.9
2 to 9999
0.00 to 5.00
%
ms
%
Current limitation regulator proportional band
Current limitation regulator integration time
Current restriction regulator output limitation
Specify proportional band for current limitation control system P (%) = x 100%.1
Proportional gain
Specify integration time for current limitation control system.
Specify output restriction for current limitation control regulator.
No.104 to 109: Setting items on output voltage
Touch panel setting class display: "VOLT.DET."
No.111 to 113: Setting items on current limitation
Touch panel setting class display: "I1 LIMITER"
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
107 0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingOutput current limitation(drawing)
CAUTION
The start withdrawing(current limitation starting) or the restrat withdrawing(current limitation restarting) when instantaneous power interruption sets the output current limitation value.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value, the calculated limitation value from No.128 (Reactive current command gain), and above setting value of No.99, 100, or No.101, 102. Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation = √(No.1072 -No.1282)When DI <No.20: MOT2> is input as No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1", this setting is not used, andNo.354 (Motor2 output current limitation(draw)) is enabled.
Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification. If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or
equipment may be damaged.
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (19/60)
4-31
115
116
117
0.60 to 99.99
2.00 to 99.99
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
s
s
ms
ms118
119 0 to 9999 ms
Voltage 0 detection delay timer
Charge check timer
SS ON delay timer
AVR ON delay timer
AVR OFF delay timer
Specify output voltage "0" detection delay time. The setting is determined by the secondary time constant of the used motor. Usually, specify a value more than 5 times of the secondary time constant.
Specify charging waiting time from detecting the higher DC voltage than undervoltage level to triggering time of DC thyristor mounted on inverter cell. Set a value subtracted the charging time up to undervoltage level because about 7 seconds is required until DC voltage is charged sufficiently after circuit breaker activated.
Specify the time up to "SS" relay ON after frequency command is input. Set this item if AVR is required to activate before SS turns to ON.
Set the setting to "0"ms if no brake is furnished. Specify the time from inputting frequency command via magnetic brake release check timer to starting of AVR control.
Set the time from "SS" off to AVR zero hold. Specify the time up to complete closing of magnetic brake after "SS" (brake close command) becomes off by detecting frequency setting "0" with magnetic brake close check timer.
No.115 to 119: Setting items on timer
Touch panel setting class display: "TIMER"
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (20/60)
0 to 1
0.00 to 99.99
0.0 to 100.0
s
%
×
No.121=1
No.121=1
121
122
123
DC braking selection
DC braking timer
DC braking current value
Specify this item as "1" to make setting No.122 and 123 settable.If this item is set to "0", items of setting No.122 and 123 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.
Specify direct current braking time in case of stopping motor rotation by applying DC brake during inverter stop under selecting DC braking mode.
Specify braking current during DC braking timer operation under selecting DC braking mode. Specify setting current as % for No.128 (Reactive current command gain).
No.121 to 123: Setting items on direct current braking
Touch panel setting class display: "DC BRAKING"
4-32
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
0.0 to 100.0
0.00 to 20.00
0.00 to 20.00
10.0 to 200.0
0 to 2
%
%
%
%
×
128
129
130
131
132
Reactive current command gain
Primary resistor compensation gain
ON delay compensation
Motor current ratio
ACR expansion selection
Specify a ratio of exciting current to motor rating current.
Specify a percent impedance of cable resistance between motor and inverter output. Primary resistance can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.Refer to paragraph on tuning for tuning procedure.
Specify a saturated value for ON delay compensation.This compensates deficit voltage amount generated at the ON/OFF time of IGBT element.This setting value can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.Refer to paragraph on tuning for tuning procedure.
Specify a ratio of motor rating current to inverter rating current. Refer to the page otherwise specified as for inverter rating capacity and rating current (page 1-4 to 5).
Adapt this value to motor specification.If a setting beyond the motor specification is specified, the motor may be damaged.
Specify this item to "1" to make setting No.133 to 149 settable.If this item is set to "0", items of setting No.133 to 149 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.In addition, if this item is set as "0", setting No.133 to 149 operate with the default value. If this item is set as "2", simple sensor-less vector control is disabled. This is used in case of output transformer attached. If this item is set as "2", startup speed search function and interruptible speed search restart function are disabled.
0.0 to 110.0
0.00 to 99.99
%
ms
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
133
134
Default: 100%
Default: 5.00ms
Output voltage compensation gain
Current command filter time constant
Specify constant gain for voltage command conversion.Change this item in usual when voltage generation is required by changing the constant to 100% on trial base.
Specify command input filter time constant for current regulator (active/reactive current regulator).
No.128 to 131: Setting items on ACR
Touch panel setting class display: "ACR"
No.132 to 149: Setting items on ACR expansion
Touch panel setting class display: "EXT.ACR"
Description of Setting Item List (21/60)
4-33
CAUTION
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
135 12.6 to 999.9
136 1.0 to 999.9
137 0.0 to 160.0
138 12.6 to 999.9
139 0.0 to 399.9
%
ms
%
%
%
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
Default :200.0%
Default :2.7ms
Default :5.0%
Default :200.0%
Default :10.0%
Active current regulator proportional band
Active current regulator integration time
Active current regulator output limitation
Reactive current regulator proportional band
Reactive current regulator output limitation
Specify proportional band for active current control system P (%) = x 100%.1
Proportional gain
Specify integration time for active current control system.
Specify output limitation value for active current regulator.
Specify proportional band for reactive current control system P (%) = x 100%.
Specify output limitation value for reactive current regulator.
140 12.6 to 999.9
141 0.0 to 160.0
142 12.6 to 999.9
143 12.6 to 999.9
144 0.0 to 160.0
%
%
%
%
%
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
Default :150.0%
Default :20.0%
Default :400.0%
Default :500.0%
Default :0.0%
Motor axis compensation regulator proportional band
Motor axis compensation regulator output limitation
Active current limitation regulator proportional band
Axis compensation regulator proportional band
Axis compensation regulator limitation
Specify proportional band for Motor axis compensation control system P (%) = x 100%.
Specify output limitation value for Motor axis compensation regulator.
Specify proportional band for active current limitation control system P (%) = x 100%.
Specify proportional band for motor Vt axis compensation regulator P (%) = x 100%.
Specify output limitation value for motor Vt axis compensation regulator.
Description of Setting Item List (22/60)
4-34
145 5.0 to 120.0 % No.132≧1 Default 15.0%Slip limitation
Specify output limitation value for motor slip frequency.If slip frequency increases beyond this limitation value, speed calculator stops temporally and regulates output current under motor speed adjusting.
146 0.0 to 120.0 % No.132≧1 Default :120.0%λ limitation
Specify limitaion value for AC voltage command (Va, Vb, Vc) used for PWM modulation. It is limitation to carrier triangle wave peak value with 100% setting.
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
147 500 to 9000
148 0.0 to 100.0
149 0.0 to 100.0
Hz
%
%
× No.132≧1
No.132≧1
No.132≧1
Default: 3000Hz (6.6kV output)
Default: 0.0%
Default: 3.0% (6.6kV output)
Carrier frequency
Lσ compensation factor
PWM modulation switching voltage
Specify carrier frequency of inverter. (Don't update factory delivery data.) Execute resetting of power source when updating the setting value. The value becomes effective after resetting power source.
Specify percent impedance of the cable between motor and inverter output.
Specify switching voltage level for inverter PWM modulation method.
Description of Setting Item List (23/60)
4-35
150 0.00 to 10.00 % No.132=2Voltage boosting amount
This setting item is to intensify voltage command via basic V / f pattern.Voltage in low speed area is intensified by using voltage boosting frequency setting No.151 together.
151 0.1 to 200.0 Hz No.132=2Voltage boosting frequency
Specify this item to increase the voltage and motor output torque in low speed area. Input a frequency lower than base frequency. If output frequency is "0", torque in low speed area is increased by adding basic voltage command with an attenuation amount which makes this frequency to "0" using boosting amount specified by No.150 .
Base frequency Rated frequency
No.150
Voltage command pattern
0
Voltage boosting
Voltage command
No.151
152 0.0 to 999.9 ms No.132=2Reactive current detecting HPF filter time constant
Specify current detecting HPF (high pass filter) time constant for controlling reactive current oscillation suppression.
153 0.0 to 200.0 % No.132=2Reactive current limitation level
Specify limitation level for reactive current.
154 12.6 to 999.9 % No.132=2Reactive current limitation regulator proportional band
Reactive current limitation regulator proportional band P (%) = x 100%.1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
1 to 16
200 to 11000 kVA
×
×
156
157
for 6.6kV: 10Inverter multiplex order
Inverter rating capacity
Specify "10" for 6.0kV output inverter.
Specify the rating capacity of inverter. Set the capacity value indicated in the table below from the ratings capacity and the rated voltage of the inverter that uses it. This value is used to indicate current value [A] and to change the internal parameter values.
Adapt this value to motor specification.If a setting beyond the motor specification is specified, the motor may be damaged.
No.156 to 159: Setting items on inverter
Touch panel setting class display: "INVERTER"
Description of Setting Item List (24/60)
4-36
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
Nominal capacity[kVA]
6.0kV 6.6kV
No.157setting value
CAUTION
420 470 470500 570 570600 670 672700 780 784860 960 9601000 1120 11201200 1320 13201400 1540 15401600 1750 17501800 2000 19802100 2300 23102360 2600 26002700 3000 30363200 3500 35003780 4150 41634300 4750 4760
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (25/60)
4-37
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 3 ×158 Cell rating voltage selection
Select the rating DC voltage value of cell.0: 783V (corresponding to 4000V, 6000V, 10kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (626V). 1: 712V (corresponding to 3600V, 5400V, 9.0kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (569V). 2: 783V (corresponding to 4000V, 6000V, 10kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (587V). 3: 712V (corresponding to 3600V, 5400V, 9.0kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (534V). 4: 864V (corresponding to 4400V, 6600V, 11kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (680V). 5: 786V (corresponding to 3960V, 5900V, 9.9kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (619V). 6: 864V (corresponding to 4400V, 6600V, 11kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (638V). 7: 786V (corresponding to 3960V, 5900V, 9.9kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (580V).
Spare
Spare
Inverter cell DC fuse selection1: without DC fuse, 0: with DC fuse
159 00 to 11 ×Cell software SW1
- - DC fuse
Spare
-
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (26/60)
4-38
No.160 to 167: Setting items on software switch
Touch panel setting class display: "SOFTWARE SW"
Di up/down mode operation selection 1: follow frequency control output, 0: fixed gradient
OVL operation......Operation for restraining main circuit voltage rising by reducing regenerating quantity through making frequency reduction rate to "0" in case of cell main circuit DC voltage arising more than 1600V.
Di operation mode selection 1: up/down mode, 0: notch operation mode
Frequency command reverse selection 1: frequency reverse, 0: normal
Operation mode selection 1: Motor-only operataion mode, 0: MICREX cooperative operation mode
160 0000 to 1111 ×Software SW1
ERATE POFF Touch panel OVL
Speed reduction rate selection at emergency 1: usual rate, 0: abrupt frequency reduction rate
Operation selection at DI-RUN off 1: pulse off, 0: frequency reduction to stop
Touch panel, loader, POD operation selection 1: operation disable, 0: operation enable
Operation selection at OVL overvoltage 1: none, 0: frequency reduction to stop
161 0000 to 1111 ×Software SW2
UP-DOWN DI mode FREVM single / MICREX
Restart operation selection at medium/light fault 1: restart by fault cause rejection, 0: restart disable
ON delay compensation selection (synchronizing to) 1: current command, 0: current detection
Spare
AVR regulator operation selection 1: PI regulator, 0: IP regulator
162 0000 to 1101 ×Software SW3
Medium fault ON delay - AVRPI/IP
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (27/60)
4-39
Cell control power source selection 1: feed from control PS, 0: feed from main circuit
Main circuit undervoltage operation selection 1: without UV fault detection, 0: with UV fault detection
163 0000 to 1123 ×Software SW4
Cell PS UV
CAUTION
Inverteroutput frequency
For "Forward rotation" the frequency command
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Inverteroutput frequency
Inverteroutput frequency
Forward
Inverteroutput frequency
Reverse
For "Reversal rotation" the frequency command
Reverse
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Start operation selection0: Speed search start1:0Hz start2: Drawing in start (current limitation start)Note) Search at starting is disable if No.132 = 2 selected.
Drawing in start operation selection (Refer to the figure below). 0: Draw it in from this polarity of the frequency command. 1: Draw it in from a reverse-polarity of the frequency command. 2: Draw it in from this polarity of the frequency command.
(polarity reversing when drawing in failure is retried.)3: Draw it in from a reverse-polarity of the frequency command.
(polarity reversing when drawing in failure is retried.)
Start Drawing
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (28/60)
4-40
AVR braking side limitation selection 1: calculate from grid voltage, 0: fixed (1560V)
AI frequency bias switching selection 1: selected, 0: not selected
AI / DI frequency command selection 1: AI frequency command selection, 0: DI frequency command selection
Over voltage ground detection signal input selection 1: Power supply loess optical type 0: Type in the past
165 0000 to 1110 ×Software SW6
AVR limitation Ai bias AISEL OVG
167 0 to 1 1: ProtectProtection for setting data
If this item is set to "1", all the setting data other than this item cannot be updated.Specify this in case of protecting the setting data.
Comment indication on touch panel 1: English, 0: Japanese
Restart selection after instant. power failure 1: restart from frequency just before pulse off, 0: speed search
Note) Search at starting is disable if No.132 = 2 selected.
Main circuit undervoltage fault selection at instant power failure 1: without detection, 0: with detection
164 0000 to 1111 ×Software SW5
ENGLISHPower failure
UV at Instant. power failure
Ratings excitation selection when starting 0: Start without excitation 1: Start after ratings are excitedNote) Only when No.163 = xx1x is selected, "Start after ratings are excited" become effective.
Ratings excitation
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (29/60)
4-41
0 to 1 ×172 0: None, 1: SelectFault expansion selection
Specify this item to "1" to make setting No.173 to 178 settable.If this item is set to "0", items of setting No.173 to 178 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.In addition, if this item is set as "0", setting No.173 to 178 operate with the default value.
Update operation level at fault. The default value is "1100."0: heavy fault, 1: heavy fault, 2: medium fault, 3: light fault, 4: light fault
Digit 1,000 Motor overload
Overspeed
CB switching fault
Earth fault
Settable 1, 2, 3
Settable 1, 3
Settable 0, 4
Settable 0, 3
Setting digit Assigned fault Setting value
1100 to 3343 × No.172=1173 Default: 1100Fault level selection 1
Digit 100
Digit 10
Digit 1
CAUTION
No.169 to 178: Setting items on faults
Touch panel setting class display: "FAULT"
169 10.0 to 399.9
170 11.0 to 400.0
%
%
171 10.0 to 999.9 s
Motor overload continuous rating
Motor overload setting current
Motor overload detecting time period
Specify a continuous current corresponding value when motor continuous rating current is made 100%. If No.131: (Motor current ratio) = (motor rating current) / (inverter rating current) is specified correctly, 100% corresponds to motor rating current.
Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment may be damaged.
Specify an allowable value for motor overload current.Specify this setting value so as to become No.170>No.169.(Ex. Specify "150" for 150% 60s.)
Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment may be damaged.
Specify a time up to detect fault when No.170 overload current continues from "0". (Ex. Specify "60" for 150% 60s.)
Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment may be damaged.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (30/60)
4-42
1 to 800 Word ×DSM card mounted181
D-Line: 1 to 63, T-Link: 400 or 800DSM received data quantity
Set quantity of DSM received data.With 1 to 63, D line mode and with 400 or 800, T link mode are set ,respectively.① D line mode : (quantity of received data per 1 set) × (quantity of sets on the same line) is set.② T link mode : by setting of 400, change to receiving 4 WORD/sending 4 WORD.
by setting of 800, change to receiving 8 WORD/sending 8 WORD.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 127 Station ×180 Transmission slave address
Setting No.180 to 191: Setting Items concerned with Transfer
Touch panel setting class display :"TRANSMISSION"
Set slave address of DSM at the time of MICREX (D-LINE or T-LINK) mode or set slave address of PSB at the time of PROFIBUS mode.Setting range depends upon modes (switchover of modes is performed by setting No.181.) When D-LINE mode, 1 to 7 When T-LINK mode, 0 to 99 When PROFIBUS mode, 0 to 127 Set for neither repetition nor the omission of a set number to exist to one-7 or less in the same line when you transmit D-LINE.Set the first address of data when you transmit T-LINK.
1.0 to 99.9
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 400.0
0.1 to 60.0
s
Hz
%
s
No.172=1
No.172=1
No.172=1
No.172=1
175
176
177
178
Default: 1.0s
Default: 4.0Hz
Default: 105.0%
Default: 5.0s
Medium fault shutdown timer
Startup hang-up detection frequency
Startup hang-up detection current level
Startup hang-up detection time period
Specify timer up to abrupt speed reduction to stop after medium fault occurrence. The default value is 1s.
Startup hang-up is detected when such status continues for more than No.178 as inverter output frequency is lower than No.176 and output current detection value (converted to motor) is higher than No.177.
CAUTION
DSM card orPSB card mounted
D-Line:1~7, T-Link:0~99,Profibis:0~127
Update operation level of faults. The default value is "1000".0: heavy fault, 1: heavy fault, 2: medium fault, 3: light fault, 4: light fault
1000 to 4000 × No.172=1174 Default: 1000Fault level selection 2
Transfer error
Spare
Spare
Spare
Settable 1, 2, 4
Settable 0
Settable 0
Settable 0
Setting digit Assigned fault Setting value
Digit 1,000
Digit 100
Digit 10
Digit 1
CAUTION
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (31/60)
4-43
12.6 to 999.9
1.0 to 999.9
0.1 to 200.0
%
ms
Hz
192
193
194
Active current regulator for speed search proportional band
Active current regulator for speed search integration time
Forward /Reverse revolution discrimination frequency
Setting No.190 - 198: Speed search setting item
Touch panel setting class display : "SEARCH"
Set proportional band of active current control system for speed search "P (%) = x 100%"
Set integration time of active current regulation system for speed search.
Set discrimination revel of motor revolution direction when speed search processing.
1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 1 ×
185
186
187
188
Internal send bit selection 1
Internal send bit selection 2
Internal send bit selection 3
Action selection at transfer error
Set these items when selecting inverter internal bit returned to transfer line.Selection of sending data can be selected from DO output data (pages of 5-8 to 11)
Set an operation pattern when transfer error has occurred while operated by transfer mode.
・When transfer error has occurred, it performs the fault action selected by setting No.174. However,when Major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the fault recording is performed after stop.
・When major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the Major fault 2 is recordedwhen transfer error has occurred and instantly it is changed to "motor free run condition".When setting No.174 is set to other than Major fault 2 (1xxx),
it actuates alike as "setting No.188 = 0".
0.1 to 5500.0
0.1 to 5500.0
s
s
190
191
Transmission inching acceleration time
Transmission inching deceleration time
Accelerate by the transmission bit command <RATE> at the moving slightly acceleration time, and decelerate at the moving slightly deceleration time. Set time up to 0-Hz rated frequency at time.
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
182
183
184
Internal send data selection 1
Internal send data selection 2
Internal send data selection 3
Set these items when selecting inverter internal data returned to transfer line.Selection of sending data can be selected from AO output data (pages of 5-1 - 4)
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
DSM card orPSB card mounted
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (32/60)
4-44
0 to 1 ×200 Setting selection for testingBy control power supply "switching off", it is cleared to “0”.
Setting No.200 - 217: Setting items for testing
Touch panel setting class display : "FOR TEST"
For setting No.201-217 settable, set this setting in "1".If this setting is "0", items from setting No.201 to 217 are not indicated in Touch panel and dedicated loader and can not be referred or changed.Even if this setting is set in "1", setting value is cleared to "0" by switching OFF the control power supply .
CAUTION
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 9999
0.0 to 100.0 %
196
197For forward revolution
Retry restriction for Speed search
Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (+ side)
Set limitation value of retry number when speed search unsuccessful. If retry number of speed search is over this setting, speed search abnormality is detected. After that, it actuates according to the setting of No.195.
Set the initial value of acceleration/deceleration calculator output when speed search is abnormal.
0.0 to 100.0 %198For reverse revolution
Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (- side)
Set an action mode when speed search abnormality has been detected because the number of speed searchtry exceeds the value in setting No.196.
If speed search is abnormal, it stops as Major fault 2.
Depending on discrimination result when speed search processing, a frequency of No.197 [forforward revolution] or No.198 [for reverse revolution] is set in acceleration / decelerationcalculator output and operation is continued. If the discrimination result of polarity is "0", a frequencyfor No.197 [for forward revolution] is set in acceleration / deceleration calculator output.
Depending on the polarity of the frequency command value, a frequency of No.197 [for forwardrevolution] or No.198 [for reverse revolution] is set in acceleration / deceleration calculator output andoperation is continued. When a frequency command value is "0", a frequency of No.197 [for forwardrevolution] is set in acceleration / deceleration calculator output.
For the polarity of frequency command value, frequency setting value of the reverse polarity(when frequency command is forward revolution, No.198 [for reverse revolution], when frequency
command is reverse revolution , No.197 [for forward revolution]) is set in acceleration / decelerationcalculator output and operation is continued.
When a frequency command value is "0", the frequency of No.197 [for forward revolution] is set inacceleration / deceleration calculator output.
0 to 3195 Action at speed search abnormal
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (33/60)
4-45
12.6 to 999.9
1.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 399.9
%
ms
%
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
206
207
208
R1 tuning reactive current regulator proportional band
R1 tuning reactive current regulator integration time
R1 tuning reactive current regulator limitation
At the time of R1 tuning,set proportional band of reactive current control system P (%) = × 100%.
At the time of R1 tuning,set integral time of reactive current control system.
At the time of R1 tuning,set output limitation value of reactive current regulator.
1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0 to 6
-400.0 to 400.0 %
No.200=1
No.200=1
203
204
Signal selection for testing
Data for testing
When setting No.203 is set by "0 to 6", setting for inputting simulative detection data .A signal code which input a simulative data in setting No.203 is set.
0:non, 1:iq detected, 2:id detected, 3:Line Vq, 4:line Vd, 5:line Vs, 6:Vdc (100%/2000V) Data values which input simulative data in setting No.204 is set.
CAUTION
00 to 11 No.200=1201 For automatic test 1-/-/PCB test/ voltage
Spare
Spare
For PCB testing
Voltage
Spare
Spare
For PCB testing
For voltage generation testing
00 to 11 No.200=1202 For automatic test 2 -/-/Operation clear/Fault clear
Spare
Spare
Operation clear
Fault clear
Spare
Spare
Clear Operation time
Clear Fault history
CAUTION
CAUTION
Digit 1,000
Digit 100
Digit 10
Digit 1
Digit 1,000
Digit 100
Digit 10
Digit 1
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (34/60)
4-46
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 30.0
0.0 to 999.9
%
s
%
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
215
216
217
Reactive current tuning starting condition
Reactive current tuning start delay timer
Reactive current tuning pass/fail distinction level
218 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 1
219 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 2
220 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 3
221 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 4
222 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 5
223 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 6
224 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 7
Set output level of voltage control system (AVR) for reactive current tuning start-up.
Set the time from establishment of reactive current tuning start-up condition to tuning start-up.
Set distinction level of success or failure in establishing tuning by deviation of frequency command value and detected value.
For future use (unused)
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
12.6 to 999.9
1.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 399.9
%
ms
%
No.200=1
No.200=1
No.200=1
209
210
211
R1 tuning active current regulator proportional band
R1 tuning active current regulator integration time
R1 tuning active current regulator limitation
At the time of R1 tuning,set proportional band of active current regulator P (%) = ×100%.
At the time of R1 tuning,set integral time of active current control system.
At the time of R1 tuning,set output limitation value of active current regulator.
12.6 to 999.9 % No.200=1212Reactive current tuning regulator proportional band
Set proportional band of reactive current tuning regulator P (%) = ×100%.
1.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 399.9
ms
%
No.200=1
No.200=1
213
214
Reactive current tuning regulator integration time
Reactive current tuning regulator limitation
Set integral time of reactive current tuning regulator.
Set output limitation value of reactive current tuning regulator.
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (35/60)
4-47
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
225
226
227
228
229
231
230
232
AO data 1 (internal)
AO data 2 (internal)
AO data 3 (internal)
AO data 4 (internal)
AO data 5 (external)
AO data 6 (external)
AO data 7 (external)
AO data 8 (external)
Controller AO CH1
Controller AO CH2
Controller AO CH3
Controller AO CH4
External AO CH1
External AO CH2
External AO CH3
External AO CH4
Setting No.225 - 232: AO setting items
Touch panel setting class display : “AO”
0 to 1
-400.0 to 400.0
times
%
×
-400.0 to 400.0
times
%
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
233
235
236
237
234
AO expansion selection
AO data 1 gain (internal)
AO data 1 off-set (internal)
AO data 2 gain (internal)
AO data 2 off-set (internal)
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
When analog data code (see pages of 5-1 to 4) is set in above No.225 - No.228 , corresponded analog data can be output from AO each channel of the controller (CN 14)Default output is ±400%/±10V, however, by setting No.233 - 241 , gain or offset is changeable.
When analog data code (see pages of 5-1 to 4) is set in above No.229 - No.232 , corresponded analog data can be output from AO each channel of the externally-mounted AO card (Optional).Default output is ±400%/±10V, however, by setting No.233, 242 - 249 , gain or offset is changeable.
Setting No.233 - 250: Expanded AO setting item
Touch panel setting class display : “EXT.AO”
To make setting No.234 – 250 settable, "1" is set in this setting.If this setting is "0" , items of No.234 – 250 are not indicated in Touch panel or the dedicated loader and can no be referred or changed. It actuates with default values.
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
times
%
times
%
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
238
239
240
241
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
AO data 3 gain (internal)
AO data 3 off-set (internal)
AO data 4 gain (internal)
AO data 4 off-set (internal)
Change the gain or off-set of controller AO.Default output is ±400%/±10V, however, changing gain enables optional unit amount to output. If changing to ±100%/±10V is required, set the gain with 4.00 times. Moreover, setting off-set value with other than "0" makes the level of setting value output to AO as "0" .If setting No.233 is "0", it actuates with Default.When the absolute value output is specified, the output is possible by the assumption of the gain setting minus set. Example: When the absolute value of the gain "Four times" is output, -4.00 times are set.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (36/60)
4-48
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0
times
times
times
%
times
%
times
%
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
No.233=1
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
Default : 1.00
Default : 0.0%
AO data 5 gain (external)
AO data 5 off-set (external)
AO data 6 gain (external)
AO data 6 off-set (external)
AO data 7 gain (external)
AO data 7 off-set (external)
AO data 8 gain (external)
AO data 8 off-set (external)
Change the gain or off-set of optional external AO.Default output of AO is ±400%/±10V, however, changing gain enables optional unit amount to output. Moreover, setting off-set value with other than "0" makes "0" level of setting value perform AO output.If setting No.233 is "0", it operates with Default.When the absolute value output is specified, the output is possible by the assumption of the gain setting minus set. Example: When the absolute value of the gain "Four times" is output, -4.00 times are set.
1 to 12 No.233=1250 Default :1AO cell temperature selection
Set the selected cell when selected cell cooling frame temperature is set into AO output. For 1:U1 cell, 2:U2 cell, 3:U3 cell, 6:V1 cell, 7:V2 cell, 8:V3 cell, 11:W1 cell, 12:W2 cell, 13:W3 cell, temperatures of the cooling frames is output to AO. The preset value 4, 5, 9, 10, 14, and 15 are reserves.If setting No.233 is "0", it operates with Default.
Setting No.252 - 281:DIO expansion setting item
Touch panel setting class display : "EXT.DIO"
0 to 1 ×252 DIFANH function Normal open/close
Select Standard actuation (Open/Close) of DI FANH signal (TEMPA) of Relay unit.When setting is "0", terminals close by signal ON.When setting is "1" , terminals open by signal ON.
0.01 to 10.00 s253 DIFANHL detection timer
Set DI FANH signal (TEMPA) of Relay unit and detection ON-Delay timer of DI FANL signal (TEMPB).
0 to 1 ×254 DO FTH function selection
Select output of DO signal (FTH) of Relay unit as follows.When setting is "0", terminals close depending on occurring conditions of Major fault 1 or Major fault 2When setting is "1", terminals close depending on occurring conditions of Major fault 1.
0 to 1 ×255 DIO expansion setting
For making setting No.256 to 281 settable, "1" is set in this setting. When this setting is "0", items of setting No.256 to 281 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can no be changed. It operates with Default.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
-99.99 to 99.99
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (37/60)
4-49
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
×
×
×
×
×
×
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
265
266
267
268
269
270
Default : 3(SS)
Default : 13(RSTX)
Default : 15(Completion of Charging )
Default : 21(Frequency arriving at lower limit)
Default : 22(Frequency arriving at upper limit)
Default : 12(TST)
DO Y1 function selection
DO Y2 function selection
DO Y3 function selection
DO Y4 function selection
DO Y5 function selection
DO Y6 function selection
Function of DO signal (Y1-Y6) of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-8 to 11. The digital output can be done from DO signal (Y1-Y6) of the relay unit by setting the DO function data code (5-8-11 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it closes (contacting) between terminals by signal on.. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it opens (opening) between terminals by signal on.. When setting No.255 is "0", it operates with Default.
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
×
×
×
×
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
256
257
258
259
Default : 8 (POFF)
Default : 2(FWD)
Default : 3(REV)
Default : 4(FTA)
DI X1 function selection
DI X2 function selection
DI X3 function selection
DI X4 function selection
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
×
×
×
×
×
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
No.255=1
260
261
262
263
264
Default : 5(FTB)
Default : 7(ERST)
Default : 11(AISEL)
Default : 12(AIC)
Default : 15(JOG)
DI X5 function selection
DI X6 function selection
DI X7 function selection
DI X8 function selection
DI X9 function selection
Function of DI signal (X1-X9) of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-5 to 7. The digital input can be done from DI signal (X1-X9) of the relay unit by setting the DI function data code (5-5-7 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it is considered that it is the close (contacting) between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it is considered that it is the opening between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. When setting No.255 is "0", it operates with Default.Note) Do not do the same DI function allocation to the two or more input terminal so that there is fear of irregular operation.
0 to 3 ×271Mask selection at power failure of DIFANHL
Select the detection mask condition of DI FANH signal (TEMPA) and DI FANL signal (TEMPB) of the relay unit when the power failure is detected momentarily.
When "0" is set; There is no detection mask. When "1" is set; It is a mask a control power supply split-second power failure occurs as for the detection
of the DI FANH signal and the DI FANL signal. When "2" is set; It is a mask a system power supply split-second power failure occurs as for the detection
of the DI FANH signal and the DI FANL signal. When "3" is set; It is a mask the control source or a system power supply split-second power failure occurs
as for the detection of the DI FANH signal and the DI FANL signal.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (38/60)
4-50
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 200.0
Hz
Hz
No.255=1
No.255=1
276
277
Attained frequency level lower limit
Attained frequency level upper limit
Frequencycommand
Attained frequency lower limit output[Selection Do No.21 output]
No.276-No.276 0
When frequency command absolute value is below this setting value, DO of attained frequency lower limit [Selection Do No.21] turns on.For using DO of attained frequency lower limit , either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "21".
Frequencycommand
Attained frequency upper limit output[Selection Do No.22 output]
No.277-No.277 0
When frequency command absolute value is below this setting value, DO of attained frequency upper limit [Selection Do No.22] turns on.For using DO of attained frequency upper limit , either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "22".
ON
OFF
ON ONOFF
0 to 9999 s No.255=1278Input circuit breaker answerback output off-Delay timer
Set Off-Delay time of input circuit breaker answerback output (off-Delay) [selection Do No.34]. For using DO of input circuit breaker answerback output , either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "34".
0 to 1 × No.255=1279 DI operation command input switching
Set Input mode of DI operation command input.
By inputting condition of DI-RUN, operation command is active.
DI [RUN]
Operation command
Pulse input DI-RUN activates "Operation command”, and pulse input DI-STOP [33] activates "Stop command".
DI-RUN
DI-STOP[Selection Di No.33]
Operation command
Note ) The pulse width of DI-RUN and DI-STOP [Selection Di No.33] requires 20 ms or more.
20ms or more
20ms or more
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E4-51
Description of Setting Item List (39/60)
0 to 3 No.255=1280 Power supply normal output selection
Set output selection of power supply normal output [Selection Do No.59].For using DO of power supply normal output, either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "59".
Instantaneous power interruption operation continuing
No.281
Line or control instantaneouspower interruption
Power supply normal output[Selection Do No.59]
Frequency acceleration/deceleration calculator output
No.281
Line instantaneous interruption
Power supply normal output[Selection Do No.59]
No.281
Line or control instantaneous power interruption
Power supply normal output[Selection Do No.59]
1 to 1000 ms No.255=1281 Power supply normal outputOn Delay timer
Set On-Delay timer of power supply normal output [Selection Do No.59].For using DO of power supply normal output, either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "59".
Instantaneous power interruption operation continuing
No.281
Line or control instantaneous power interruption
Power supply normal output[Selection Do No.59]
Frequency acceleration/deceleration calculator output
No.281
No.281
No.281
Instantaneous power interruption operation continuing
No.281
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
In operation In no operation
- - INR-HJ5235-E
0 to 3
0.00 to 99.99
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 5500.0
200 to 1860
0.60 to 99.99
0.00 to 99.99
0.1 to 10.0
s
Hz
s
V
s
s
s
×
No.284≧2
No.284≧2
No.284≧2
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
Action selection at instantaneous power interruption
Operation continuing timer for instantaneous power interruption
Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption
Deceleration time at instantaneous power interruption
OVL voltage level at instantaneous power interruption
Restart delay timer at instantaneous power interruption
Detection timer for power failure
Setting No.284 - 291: Instantaneous power interruption setting items
Touch panel setting class display : "POWER FAILURE"
Select an action when instantaneous power interruption has been detected. When setting "0" : Major fault 1When setting "1" : Minor fault 2 [Pulse OFF]When setting "2" : Minor fault 2 [Operation continuing]When setting "3" : Minor fault 2 [Operation continuing 2, In Regeneration operation, Pulse off due to
occurrence of the main circuit undervoltage]If this setting is set with "0" and "1", items of setting No.285 to 287 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can not be referred and changed.
Set operation continuing time from the time that instantaneous power interruption of the control has occurred when no line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=0). Or set operation continuing time from the time that instantaneous power interruption of the line power control has occurred when line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=1). However, only when operation continuing at instantaneous power interruption was selected (setting No. 284≧2), this timer actuates.
Operation continuing is selected when instantaneous power interruption has occurred (setting No.284≧2), and when frequency command is below this setting value during operation continuation at instantaneous power interruption, Pulse is set to be off.
Operation continuing is selected when instantaneous power interruption has occurred (setting No.284≧2), and when instantaneous power interruption has occurred while operation continuing, operation frequency deceleration time is set.
When cell DC voltage is over this setting value during operationcontinuation at instantaneous power interruption, frequency command deceleration processing is halted and regeneration amount is inhibited.
Set restart delay time when instantaneous power interruption has recovered. After instantaneous power interruption is recovered, restart is performed after remained voltage in motor is below 5% and more than this setting time lapses .
When no line voltage detection is (setting No.293=0), set power failure detection time of the control power supply, and when line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=1), set power failure detection time of the line power supply. However, when Major fault 1 is selected at instantaneous power interruption has occurred (setting No.284=0) or this setting value is 99.99, power interruption fault detection by this setting is not performed.
Set risetime of the magnetic flux command at the time of restarting from instantaneous power interruption. However, if speed search mode is set when restarting from instantaneous power interruption (No.164=x0xx), magnetic flux command is activated with time constant of setting No.94.
Description of Setting Item List (40/60)
4-52
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Control instantaneouspower interruption
detection
In case that setting No.284 is "0" (Major fault at instantaneous power interruption)and setting No.293 is "0" (The line voltage not detected);
when instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Major fault (Fault code No.10 : instantaneouspower interruption) is recorded, and the motor is in condition of Free-run.
Major fault
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Control instantaneous powerinterruption detection
orLine instantaneous power
interruption detection
In case that setting No.284 is "0" (Major fault at instantaneous power interruption),and setting No.293 is "1" (Line voltage detected);
when control or line instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Major fault (Fault code No.10 :instantaneous power interruption or No.11: line instantaneous power interruption) is recorded, and themotor is in condition of Free-run.
Major fault
Free-run stop
Free-run stop
Description of Setting Item List (41/60)
4-53
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Control instantaneouspower interruption
detection
In case that setting No.284 is "1" (Pulse OFF)and setting No.293 is "0" (The line voltage not detected);
when control instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Pulse off is performed, and the motor is in condition of Free-run. After recovering the power supply, the system restarts with the frequencycommand when the instantaneous power interruption occurred.
Free-run
Description of Setting Item List (42/60)
T1 T2 T3
When control instantaneous power interruption detection time has become following condition, Major fault is recorded (fault code No.13: Power faliure)
Control instantaneous power interruption detection time >
setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]
Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.
Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].
Acceleration time T3 depends upon setting value in setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.
4-54
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Free-run
Description of Setting Item List (43/60)
T1 T2 T3
When control instantaneous power interruption detection time has become following condition, Major fault is recorded (fault code No.13 : Power failure)
Control instantaneous power interruption detection time >
setting No.297 [Detection timer for control power failure]
Do not do control power failure fault detection when you set setting No.297=99.99 s.
When line instantaneous power interruption detection time has become following condition, Major fault is
recorded (fault code No.12 : Line power failure)
Line instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]
Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.
When control instantaneous power interruption and line instantaneous power interruption has occurred
concurrently, the fault is recorded what has been established in advance for the above condition.
Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power
interruption drawing restart selection].
Acceleration time T3 depends upon setting value of setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.
In case that setting No.284 is "1" (Pulse OFF)and setting No.293 is "1" (The line voltage detectee);
when control or line instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Pulse off is performed, and the motor is in condition of Free-run. After recovering the power supply, restart with the frequency command when the instantaneous power interruption occurred..
Control instantaneous powerinterruption detection
orLine instantaneous power
interruption detection
4-55
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Depending uponacceleration setting time
f1
Control instantaneouspower interruption
detection
T1: setting No.285T2: power recoveryconfirmation time 25ms
In case that setting No.284 is "2" (Operation continuing) or "3" (Operation continuing 2)And setting No.293 is "0" (The line voltage not detected);
when control instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Regeneration operation is performed, and the motor is in condition of Operation continuing. After recovering the power supply, the system re-accelerates up to the frequency when the instantaneous power interruption occurred.
Regeneration operation
When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhibiting function (HLR stop occurs if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).
If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is
performed despite the setting value of No.285 and start again after power recovery (see next page).
Inverter output frequency <
setting No.286 [Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption]
If setting of No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, or the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration
operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting value of No.285 and the
system starts again after power recovery (see next page).
Cell main circuit voltage < main circuit undervoltage level
When control instantaneous power interruption detection time has become the following condition, it is
recorded as major fault (Fault code No.13 : Power interruption).
Control instantaneous power interruption detection time >
setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]
Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.
Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting value of No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption pull-in restart selection].
Acceleration time T3 depends upon setting value of setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.
T1 T2
・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time < setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer at instantaneous power interruption]
4-56
Description of Setting Item List (44/60)
T3
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Depending uponaccelerationsetting timef1
Control instantaneouspower interruption
detection
Regeneration operation
When instantaneous power interruption detection exceeds T1 time, Pulse off is performed and the system starts again after power recovery.
When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhibiting function (HLR stop occurs if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).
If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation has become the bellow condition, perform Pulse off despite the setting value by setting No.285 and start again after power recovery (see next page).
Inverter output frequency <setting No.286 [Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption]
If setting by No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, and the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration operation has become the below condition, perform Pulse off despite the setting value by setting by No.285 and start again after power recovery (see next page).
Cell main circuit voltage < main circuit undervoltage level
When control instantaneous power interruption detection time T2 has become the below condition, it is recorded as major fault (Fault code No.13 : Power interruption).
Control instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.
Restart waiting time T3 after power recovery depends upon setting value of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].
Acceleration time T4 depends upon setting by setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.
T1
T2
・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time ≧
setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer at instantaneous power interruption]
T3 T4 T1:settingNo.285
Free-run
4-57
Description of Setting Item List (45/60)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Depending uponacceleration setting time
f1
Line instantaneouspower interruption
detection
T1: setting No.285T2: power recoveryconfirmation time 25ms
Regeneration operation
When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhabiting function (HLR stop is performed if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).
If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation is in the bellow condition, Pulse off is performed despite setting value of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).
Inverter output frequency <setting No.286 [Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption]
If setting No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, and the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration operation has become the below condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting values of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).
Cell main circuit voltage < main circuit undervoltage level
When line instantaneous power interruption detection time is in the following condition, it is recorded as major fault (Fault code No.12 : Line power failure).
Line instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.
Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].
Acceleration time T3 depends upon setting value of setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.
T1 T2
・Line instantaneous power interruption detection time <
setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer when Power interruption]
In case that setting No.284 is "2" (Operation continuing) or "3" (Operation continuing 2)and setting No.293 is "1" (The line voltage detected);
When line instantaneous power interruption is detected, regeneration operation is performed , and the motor is in condition of Operation continuing. When control power instantaneous interruption is detected,the normaloperation is continued. After recovering the power supply, the system re-accelerates up to the frequency when the instantaneous power interruption occurred.
4-58
Description of Setting Item List (46/60)
T3
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Depending uponaccelerationsetting timef1
Line instantaneouspower interruption
detection
Regeneration operation
When instantaneous power interruption detection exceeds TI time, Pulse off is performed and the system starts again after power recovery.
When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhabiting function (HLR stop is performed if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting value of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).
Inverter output frequency <setting No.286 [Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption]
If setting No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, and the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting value of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).
Cell main circuit voltage < main circuit undervoltage level
When line instantaneous power interruption detection time T2 is in the following condition, it is recorded as major fault (Fault code No.12 : Line power failure).
Line instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.
Restart waiting time T3 after power recovery depends upon setting value of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].
Acceleration time T4 depends upon setting by setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.
When control and line instantaneous power interruption occurs concurrently, Pulse off is perform when either condition of terminating operation continuing with instantaneous power interruption for control or line is established.
T1
T2
・Line instantaneous power interruption detection time ≧
setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer when Power interruption]
T3 T4
T1:Setting No.285
Free-run
4-59
Description of Setting Item List (47/60)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Control instantaneouspower interruption
detection
Normal operationcontinuing
When control and line instantaneous power interruption occurs at the same time, switching to regeneration
operation is performed at the time that line instantaneous power interruption occurs.
If control instantaneous power interruption detection time is in the following condition, it is recorded as Major
(Fault code No.13: Power interruption failure)
Control instantaneous power interruption detection time >
setting No.297 [Detection timer for control power failure]
Do not do control power failure fault detection when you set setting No.297=99.99 s.
T1
・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time <
setting No. 296 [Operation continuing timer at Control instantaneous power interruption]
T1: Setting No.296
4-60
Description of Setting Item List (48/60)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Motor rotation speed
Inverter outputfrequency command
Depending uponaccelerationsetting time
Control instantaneouspower interruption
detection
Normal operation
When instantaneous power interruption detection exceeds T1 time, Pulse off is performed and the system starts again after power recovery.
When control instantaneous power interruption detection time is in the following condition, it is recorded as
major fault (Fault code No.13: Power failure).
Control instantaneous power interruption detection time >
setting No.297 [Detection timer for control power failure]
Do not do control power failure fault detection when you set setting No.297=99.99 s.
Restart waiting time T3 after power recovery depends upon setting value of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous
power interruption drawing restart selection].
Acceleration time T4 depends upon setting of setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.
When control and line instantaneous power interruption occurs at the same time, switching to regeneration
operation is performed at the time that line instantaneous power interruption occurs.
Moreover, Pulse off is perform when either condition of terminating operation continuing with instantaneous power interruption for control or line is established.
T1
T2
・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time ≧
setting No. 296 [Operation continuing timer at Control power instantaneous interruption]
T3 T4
T1:setting No.296
Free-run
4-61
Description of Setting Item List (49/60)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
0 to 1
50.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 150.0
0.00 to 99.99
0.00 to 99.99
75.0 to 125.0
%
%
s
s
%
×
No.293=1
No.293=1
No.293=1
No.293=1
No.293=1
293
294
295
296
297
298
0: non, 1: detectedLine voltage detection switchover
Line voltage detection compensation gain
Line voltage instantaneous power interruption detection level
Operation continuing timer for control instantaneous power interruption
Detection timer for control power failure
Cell DC voltage limitation compensation
Setting No.293 - 298: Line voltage setting items
Touch panel setting class display : "MAIN VOLT."
When detecting line voltage, set "1".When setting "0" in this setting, items of setting No.294 to 298 and 300 are not displayed on touch panel and dedicated loader and they can not be referred and changed.
When line voltage is same as setting No.19 [Output rated voltage], set actual value data as "No.475 = 100% +1%, -0% ".
Specify instantaneous power interruption detection level of line voltage.
Set operation continuing time from the time that control power supply instantaneous interruption occurred, if line voltage detection is set enable. However, only when operation continuing at instantaneous power interruption was selected (setting No. 284≧2), this timer actuates.
Set control power interruption failure detection time from the time that control power supply instantaneous interruption occurred, if line voltage detection is set enable. However, when Major fault 1 is selected at instantaneous power interruption has occurred (setting No.284=0) or this setting value is 99.99, power interruption fault detection by this setting is not performed.
Set cell DC voltage which limits AVR braking side and compensation value of cell DC voltage which makes command value for PLL reactive voltage command regulator 2.
Transformer tap voltage
Input rated voltageCompensation value =
When input rated voltage 3300V is connected to the tap for 3150V,
3150V
3300VCompesnation value = ≒ 104.8%
Description of Setting Item List (50/60)
4-62
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0.0 to 150.0 % No.293=1299Line voltage instantaneous power interruption detection level 2
Specify instantaneous power interruption detection level 2 of line voltage.
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting No.300 - 317: Synchronous switchover setting items
Touch panel setting class display : "SYNCRONOUS"
0 to 1
250 to 9999
1 to 9999
0.0 to 399.9
%
ms
%
×
0.01 to 60.00
0.50 to 99.99
Hz
s
No.293=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
300
301
302
303
304
305
Synchronous switchover between line and inverter selection
PLL regulator proportional band
PLL regulator integration time
PLL regulator limitation
PLL output scale
PLL operation start-up delay timer
-65.0 to 65.0
0.1 to 60.0
5.0 to 999.9
%
s
%
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
306
307
308
PLL reactive voltage command
PLL reactive voltage command speed adjusting calculation time
PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator proportional band
Set "1", when performing synchronous switching from inverter to line or from line to inverter.This setting is active when line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=1). When "0" is set in this setting, items of setting No.301 to 314 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can not be referred and changed.
Proportional band of PLL control system P(%)= ×100%
Set integration time of PLL control system.
Set output limitation of PLL regulator.
Set output scale of PLL regulator.
Set waiting time up to the start-up of synchronous switchover processing from the time that frequency command reaches synchronous frequency, when synchronous switchover is performed.
Set reactive voltage command value of PLL regulator as "= sinθ".Where θ = (Phase angle of Line voltage) – (Phase angle of inverter output voltage)This is set if phase difference "θ" between line voltage and inverter output voltage is changed.
Set rate of change of PLL reactive voltage (the time required for change width of 100%).
Set proportional band of PLL reactive voltage compensation control system P(%) = ×100%
0.0 to 50.0 % No.300=1309PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator output limitation
Set output limitation value for PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator 1.
Description of Setting Item List (51/60)
4-63
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
5.0 to 999.9
0.0 to 50.0
13 to 9999
13 to 9999
13 to 9999
50.0 to 150.0
%
%
%
%
%
%
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
No.300=1
310
311
312
313
314
315
PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator 2 proportional band
PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator 2 output limitation
Synchronous active current regulator proportional band
Synchronous reactive current regulator proportional band
Synchronous motor axis compensation regulator proportional band
Synchronous magnetic flux compensation
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
%
%
No.300=1
No.300=1
316
317
Slip reduction rate at synchronous switching to line
Output reactor %X
Set output limitation value for PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator 2.
Set proportional band of active current control system during PLL operation P(%) = ×100%
Setting range , if setting No.312 ≧ setting No.135, is active current regulator proportional band.
Set proportional band of motor axis compensation control during PLL operation P(%) = ×100%
Setting range, if setting No.314 ≧ setting No.140, is axis deviance compensation regulator proportional band.
Set proportional band of reactive current control system during PLL operation P(%) = ×100%
Setting range , if setting No.313 ≧ setting No.138, is reactive current regulator proportional band.
Set so as that the following condition: output reactor (loading side) voltage = line voltage of +2% to -0% is get, when synchronous switchover between line and inverter is performed.
Set rate of slip reduction for frequency setting when synchronous switching. Frequency command = commercial frequency detection value - Minimum frequency (setting No.6) × rate of slip reduction at synchronous switching (setting No. 316)
Set "%X" of output reactor for synchronization with commercial line .
Description of Setting Item List (52/60)
4-64
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 163
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
0 to 199
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
DIO card mounted
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
SW2=DIOA limitation
DI X11 function selection (DIO card)
DI X12 function selection (DIO card)
DI X13 function selection (DIO card)
DI X14 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y11 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y12 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y13 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y14 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y15 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y16 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y17 function selection (DIO card)
DO Y18 function selection (DIO card)
Setting No.319 – 330 : DIO card setting items
Touch panel setting class display: "DIO CARD"
Only when DIO card is connected to controller 8 bits bus, settings of No.319 to No.330 are displayed on Touch panel and Loader, and settable. In addition, SW2 on DIO card is used by inserting to DIO-A side.
Description of Setting Item List (53/60)
4-65
Function of DO signal (Y11-Y18) of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-8 to 11. The digital output can be done from DO signal (Y11-Y18) of the relay unit by setting the DO function data code (5-8-11 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it closes (contacting) between terminals by signal on.. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it opens (opening) between terminals by signal on..
Function of DI signal (X11-X14) of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-5 to 7. The digital input can be done from DI signal (X11-X14) of the relay unit by setting the DI function data code (5-5-7 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it is considered that it is the close (contacting) between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it is considered that it is the opening between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. Note) Do not do the same DI function allocation to the two or more input terminal so that there is fear of irregular operation.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
0.0 to 60.0
0 to 9999
0.0 to 120.0
0 to 4
0 to 1
-100.0 to 100.0
s
ms
%
%
×
×
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
336
337
338
339
340
341
PID FB filter time constant
PID output filter time constant
PID limitation
PID command selection
PID FB selection
Touch panel PID command
0.0 to 3600.0
0.00 to 10.00
s
s
No.332≧1
No.332≧1
334
335
PID integration time
PID differential time
Set integration time of PID regulator. When setting value is 0 or 3600s, integration item output is "0".
Set differential time of PID regulator. When setting value is 0, differential item output is "0".
Set filter time constant of feed back signal of PID.
Set filter time constant of output of PID.
Set limitation of output of PID.
Select feed back signal of PID. When setting is 0: Ai1 (4-to 20mA). When setting is 1: Ai2 (±10V)In addition, if the same signal is selected for PID command and feed back, PID output become "0".
Set signal for command value of PID. When setting is 0: Di frequency command. When setting is 1: Touch panel PID command (setting No.341). When setting is 2: Ai1(4-20mA) frequency command. When setting is 3: Ai2 (±10V) frequency command. When setting is 4: Transmission (setting No.160=xxx0 demanded).
When Touch panel PID command is selected for command value of PID (when setting No.339=1), set PID command.
Description of Setting Item List (54/60)
4-66
Setting No.332 – 341 : PID setting items
Touch panel setting class display : "PID"
0 to 2
10.0 to 999.9 %
×
No.332≧1
332
333
PID operation selection
PID proportional band
Set "1" or "2", when making PID command active.If "1" is set, PID output is specified as frequency command. If "2" is set. operation is performed by the frequency other than PID and PID output is used for frequency compensation.If "0" is set in this setting, items of setting No.332 to 340 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can no be referred and changed.
Proportional band of PID regulator P(%) = ×100%1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
=command ーFB
a
-a
b
2b
PD regulator(setting No.334=0)
1.37*bTd
(No.335)
-b
b
-2b
PI regulator(setting No.335=0)
b
b
b
b
-b
P regulator(setting No.334=No.335=0,)
2b
Ti
PID regulator
b
b
b
2bTi
2b
b
b
b
b = 1/P * a
(No.334)
Description of Setting Item List (55/60)
b = 1/P * a
b = 1/P * a
b = 1/P * a
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
b
b
ON OFF
(No.334)
-b
4-67
- - INR-HJ5235-E
0 to 1
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 200.0
100 to 9999
0 to 9999
0.1 to 200.0
0.0 to 100.0
Hz
Hz
V
ms
Hz
%
×
×
×
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
Changeover to setting No. 2
Changeover to setting No. 3
Changeover to setting No. 19
Changeover to setting No. 94
Changeover to setting No. 21
Changeover to setting No. 22
Motor 2 setting enable
Motor 2 rating frequency
Motor 2 base frequency
Motor 2 output rated voltage
Motor 2 magnetic flux setting filter time constant
Motor 2 magnetic flux boosting frequency
Motor 2 magnetic flux boosting amount
Setting No.343 - 366: Motor 2 setting items
Touch panel setting class display : "MOTOR2"
Set "1", when Motor 2" setting is made to be avalable.Make <No.20:MOT2> of DI to be ON in order to use of Motor 2 changeover.For assigning DI, select function selection setting (setting No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1-to X9, X11 to X14 separately.If "0" is set in this setting, only items of setting No.345 to 367 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated Loader and can not be referred and changed.
Set rating frequency of Motor 2. This value becomes 100% output frequency when Motor 2 changeover (<No.20:MOT2> of DI is ON).
Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.
If magnetic field weaking control of Motor 2 is required, specify magnetic field weaking starting frequency.If magnetic field weaking control of Motor 2 is not required, specify the same value as the rated frequency.This setting is avalable when changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed.
Adapt to specifications of Motor.Motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.
This is the item to set the rated voltage of Motor 2. This value becomes 100% output voltage when changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20:MOT2> of DI is ON).
Adapt to specifications of Motor.Motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.
Set the value corresponding to magnetic flux alteration of Motor 2. Control stability is kept by setting the value corresponding to more than secondary time constant of Motor.The setting value is more than the value which is found by formula "(L2+Lm)/r2".When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Set the frequency for intensifying motor output torque of Motor 2. Input a frequency up to base frequency. When output frequency is "0", the torque in the low speed area is intensified by adding attenuation amount which becomes "0" with this frequency from boosting quantity of setting No.350 to the basic magnetic flux command. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20:MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
This is setting item when magnetic flux command is intensified from basic V/F pattern of Motor 2.Magnetic flux in low speed is intensified by using together with magnetic flux boost frequency setting.This setting becomes active at changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20:MOT2>of DI is ON).
Description of Setting Item List (56/60)
4-68
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
0.1 to 999.9
2 to 9999
0.0 to 399.9
%
ms
%
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
355
356
357
Changeover to setting No. 97
Changeover to setting No. 98
Changeover to setting No. 103
Motor 2 AVR regulator proportional band
Motor 2 AVR regulator integration time
Motor 2 output current limitation
Set proportional band of voltage control system of Motor 2 P(%) = ×100%
Adjust to a optimal value during spot adjusting.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
By comparing limitation value calculated using this setting and No.365 (reactive current command gain) with setting value of No.101 and 102, a narrower value is given priority. Set the value of a rate for motor rating. Active current limitation value = √(No.3542 -No.3652)When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.
Set integration time of voltage control system of Motor 2.Optimal adjustment is performed as well as proportional band during commissioning.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Description of Setting Item List (57/60)
% No.343=1353Changeover to setting No. 26
Motor 2 magnetic flux setting filter initial value
Specify magnetic flux setting filter initial value of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
4-69
0.0 to 400.0
0 to 9999
%
ms
No.343=1
No.343=1
351
352
Changeover to setting No. 24
Changeover to setting No. 25
Motor 2 startup magnetic flux boosting amount
Motor 2 startup magnetic flux boosting time constant
This is setting item where magnetic flux command is intensified when operation start up with basic V/F pattern of Motor 2. This corresponds to forcing at startup.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command at startup comparing the basic V/F pattern of Motor 2. This corresponds to forcing at startup. This is used together with No. 352.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
0.0 to 100.0 % No.343=1350Changeover to setting No. 23
Motor 2 weaking magnetic flux boosting amount
This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command in operation with weaking magnetic flux comparing the basic V/F pattern of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
CAUTION
1
Proportional gain
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
354 0.0 to 399.9 % No.343=1Changeover to setting No. 107
Motor 2 output current limitation(drawing)
CAUTION
The start withdrawing(current limitation starting) or the restrat withdrawing(current limitation restarting) when instantaneous power interruption sets the output current limitation value of Motor 2.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value, the calculated limitation value from No.364 (Motor 2 reactive current command gain), and above setting value of No.99, 100, or No.101, 102. Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation = √(No.3542 -No.3642)When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification. If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or
equipment may be damaged.
0.00 ~ 20.00
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Description of Setting Item List (58/60)
363 % No.343=1Changeover to setting No. 130Motor 2 on-delay compensation
4-70
10.0 to 200.0 %
%
No.343=1
No.343=1
361
362
Changeover to setting No. 131
Changeover to setting No. 129
Motor 2 motor current rate
Motor 2 primary resistance compensation gain
Specify a ratio of motor rating current to inverter rating current of Motor 2. Refer to the page otherwise specified as for inverter rating capacity and rating current (page 1-6 to 9).When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.
Specify a percent impedance of cable resistance between motor of Motor 2 and inverter output. Primary resistance can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active. The primary resistance can be automatically computed by tuning operation .For tuning method, see the tuning paragraph.
11.0 to 400.0
10.0 to 999.9
%
s
No.343=1
No.343=1
359
360
Changeover to setting No. 170
Changeover to setting No. 171
Motor 2 overload setting current
Motor 2 overload detection time period
Specify an allowable value for motor overload current of Motor 2.Specify this setting value so as to become No.359>No.358.(Ex. Specify "150" for 150% 60s.)When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.
Specify a time up to detect fault when No.359 overload current continues from "0". (Ex. Specify "60" for 150% 60s.)When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Specify a saturated value for ON delay compensation of Motor 2.This compensates deficit voltage amount generated at the ON/OFF time of IGBT element.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active. This setting value can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.Refer to paragraph on tuning for tuning procedure.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
10.0 to 399.9 % No.343=1358Changeover to setting No. 169Motor 2 overload continuous rating
Specify a continuous current corresponding value when motor continuous rating current is made 100%. If No.361: (Motor current ratio) = (motor rating current) / (inverter rating current) is specified correctly, 100% corresponds to motor rating current.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.CAUTION
0.0 to 100.0 % No.343=1364Changeover to setting No. 128
Motor 2 reactive current command gain
Specify a ratio of exciting current to motor rating current of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
0.00 ~ 20.00
0.00 ~ 20.00
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Setting No.369 to 379: Expansion setting items
Touch panel setting class display : "EXT"
Description of Setting Item List (59/60)
4-71
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
0.1 to 200.0
0.1 to 400.0
0.1 to 60.0
Hz
%
s
No.343=1
No.343=1
No.343=1
367
368
369
Changeover to setting No. 176Changeover to setting No. 177Changeover to setting No. 178
0.0 to 100.0 % No.343=1370Changeover to setting No. 317
0.0 to 100.0
0.10 to 99.99
%
Hz
No.343=1
No.343=1
365
366
Changeover to setting No. 148
Changeover to setting No. 7
Motor 2 Lσ compensation coefficient
Motor 2 lowest frequency
Specify percent impedance of the cable between motor of Motor 2 and inverter output.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Specify the value corresponding to motor rated slip frequency of Motor 2.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
CAUTION
Motor 2 startup hang-up detection frequencyMotor 2 startup hang-up detection current levelMotor 2 startup hang-up detection time period
Startup hang-up of Motor 2 is detected when such status continues for more than No.369 as inverter output frequency is lower than No.367 and output current detection value (converted to motor) is higher than No.368.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Motor 2 output reactor %X
Set "%X" of output reactor for synchronization with commercial line of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.
Station address
Operation selection at transmission abnormal(Modbus)
1 to 247
0 to 1
MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
Setting No.373 to 378:Setting Items concerned with Modbus Transfer
Touch panel setting class display : "Modbus"
373
374 ×
×
Set slave address of transmission at the time of Modbus mode.
Set an operation pattern when transfer error has occurred while operated by Modbus transfer mode.
・When transfer error has occurred, it performs the fault action selected by setting No.174. However, when Major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the fault recording is performed after stop.
・When major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the Major fault 2 is recorded when transfer error has occurred and instantly it is changed to "motor free run condition".
When setting No.174 is set to other than Major fault 2 (1xxx), it actuates alike as "setting No.374 = 0".
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Responce interval
Transmission stop detection time
Parity bit selection
Transmission speed
0.00 to 1.00
0 to 60
0 to 3
0 to 4MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
MOD card mouted
Description of Setting Item List (60/60)
s
s
×
×
×
376
377
378
Set parity bit mode of RS-485 at the time of Modbus mode.0:None (Stop bit: 2bit), 1:Even parity (Stop bit: 1bit), 2:Odd parity (Stop bit: 1bit),3:None (Stop bit: 1bit)
The RS-485 communication determination detection time at the Modbus transmission mode is set. It is detected to have become it inaccessible because of the disconnection etc. , and the breakdown operation by abnormal transmission begins for the station in the system that accesses it without fail within a certain fixed time while RS-485 communication driving. The transmission abnormality breakdown operation level is a digit of set No.174-1000, and the breakdown level of heavy breakdown 2, inside breakdown, and light breakdown 2 can be selected. When 0s setting = is set, the communication determination detection is not done.
Time from the reception end to the return of the response is set to the demand of the host at the Modbus transmission mode. Timing can be matched even with the equipment with a slow processing by setting the response time of the interval.
RequetMaster
Inverter Responset1
t1 = Response interval + αα = Operation lag time of inverter
375 ×
Set Transmission speed at the time of Modbus mode.0:2400bps, 1:4800bps, 2:9600bps, 3:19200bps, 4:38400bps
No. Item Display range Unit Remarks
Touch panel setting class display : "UNSET"
999 No-setting item of setting data 1 to 379 Only display
Only when there is non-setting item in setting data, setting class is displayed on touch panel. And, by pressing F/D key, the cursor jumps to the setting number. If there are multiple non-setting items, the lowest number is displayed.
No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation
UnitSetting
ConditionItem Remarks
4-72
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Item Default unit amount (Note 1) Remarks
5-1 Analog outputs and transmission sending internal data codes
0 0V -
1 Frequency setting value ±10V / ±400%
2 ±10V / ±400%
3 ±10V / ±400%
4 ±10V / ±400%
5 -
6 ±10V / ±400%
7 ±10V / ±400%
8 ±10V / ±400%
9 ±10V / ±400%
11 ±10V / ±400%
12 ±10V / ±400%
13 ±10V / ±400%
14 - For check
15 - For check
16 - For check0V → +10V → 0V → -10V (every 500 ms)
17 ±10V / ±400%
18 -
19 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ motor rated voltage
20 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ motor rated voltage
21 ±10V / ±400%
22 ±10V / ±400%
23 ±10V / ±400%
24 ±10V / ±400%
25 ±10V / ±400%
Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) input
Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) output
Frequency command filter output
Spare
Voltage command (after base processing)
Voltage command (after pattern processing)
Voltage command (after compensation)
Magnetic flux command before compensation
Magnetic flux command filter outputMagnetic flux command (AVR input)
Magnetic flux command (ACR)
+10V
-10V
0V/±10V oscillation
Voltage command
Spare
Output voltage estimation filter inputOutput voltage estimation filter output
AVR output
Active current Iq command
Reactive current Id command
Frequency command
Frequency command (ACR)
10 ±10V / ±400%Magnetic flux command (after boost addition)
26 ±10V / ±400%
27 ±10V / ±400%
28 ±10V / ±400%
29 ±10V / ±400%
Slip frequency
Current limitation (Forward side)
Current limitation (Reverse side)
AVR output limitation (Forwardside)
30 ±10V / ±400%AVR output limitation (Reverse side)
Unit amount is ±32000/±400% when selected as sending internal data.
Note 1) Default unit amount when AO gain is 1 time and offset is 0 %.
When setting following No. into setting No. 225 to 232, relevant data are output to the built-in AO or the external AO (optional). The same data in numerical can be referred from loader (optional) using number added 400 to No. of AO.
Chapter 5 Indication & Output Data
5-1
Analog data & transmission sending internal data codes (1/4)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Remarks
Analog output & transmission sending internal data codes (2/4)
Item
31 After frequency command filter (ACR) ±10V / ±400%
32 -
33 ±10V / ±400%
34 ±10V / ±400%
35 ±10V / ±400%
36 ±10V / ±400%
37 ±10V / ±400%
38 ±10V / ±400% Overload at 0%
39 ±10V / ±400% Overload at 0%
41 ±10V / ±400%
42 ±10V / ±400%
43 -
44 ±10V / ±400% 100% / motor rated voltage
45 -
46 ±10V / ±400%
47 ±10V / ±400%
48 ±10V / ±400%
49 ±10V / ±400%
50 ±10V / ±400%
51 ±10V / ±400%
52 ±10V / ±400% 100%/Inverter rated capacity (Note 2)
53 ±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 3)
54 ±10V / ±400%
55
±10V / ±400%
Spare
Active current Iq detection
Reactive current Id detection
Output current detection (motor converted)
Current limitation regulator input
Current limitation regulator output
Motor overload allowance
Inverter overload allowance
R1 compensation amount (reactive current component)
AI input value
Spare
Output voltage estimation
Spare
Active voltage Vq command
Reactive voltage Vd command
Voltage command
λ compensation value
AVR input
Output current detection (inverter converted)
Inverter output power
U1 cell main circuit voltage detection
U2 cell main circuit voltage detection
V1 cell main circuit voltage detection
40 ±10V / ±400%R1 compensation amount (active current component)
56
57
58
59 -Spare
Unit amount is ±32000/±400% when selected as sending internal data.
Note 1) Default unit amount when AO gain is 1 time and offset is 0 %.
5-2
Note 2) The value of the inverter ratings capacity is assumed to be 100%. (The unit is disregarded. )The example: When you show 50% inverter output electric power of Ao52 with 1250kVA inverter device 1250×50%=625kW ← When is calculated, the unit is disregarded.
Note 3) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening with a main circuit voltage of the cell charged.
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 3)
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 3)
Default unit amount (Note 1)
±10V / ±400%Spare
±10V / ±400%U3 cell main circuit voltage detection
±10V / ±400%Spare
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 3)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Remarks
Analog output & transmission sending internal data codes (3/4)
Item
61
62
±10V / ±400%
63
±10V / ±400%
64
±10V / ±400%
65
±10V / ±400%
V3 cell main circuit voltage detection
Spare
W3 cell main circuit voltage detection
Spare
66
±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 2)Main phase circuit voltage detection (average value)
Unit amount is ±32000/±400% when selected as sending internal data.
Note 1) Default unit amount when AO gain is 1 time and offset is 0 %.
67
±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 2)
68
±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 2)
Main phase circuit voltage detection (Max. value)
Main phase circuit voltage detection (Min. value)
69 ±10V / ±400%
70 ±10V / ±400%
Analog frequency command
DI frequency command
71 ±10V / ±400%
72 ±10V / ±400%
PID output
R1 computed value
73 ±10V / ±400%
74 -
ON-delay compensation computed value
Spare
75 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ rated voltageLine voltage detection
76 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ No.2 setting value
77 ±10V / ±400%
Line frequency detection
Line active voltage detection
60
78 ±10V / ±400%Line reactive voltage detection
79 -
80 ±10V / ±400% 100%/100℃ range of -40℃ to 110℃
Spare
Main controller temperature detection
81 ±10V / ±400% 100%/100℃ range of +10℃ to +110℃(Note 3)
82 ±10V / ±400% 100%/100℃ cell selection by setting No.250 (Note 3)
Cell cooling fins temperature detection (Max. value)
Selected cell cooling fins temperature detection
83
84
85
86 -
87 -
Spare
Spare
88 -
89 -
Spare
Spare
5-3
Note 2) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening with a main circuit voltage of the cell charged.
Note 3) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening.
Default unit amount (Note 1)
±10V / ±400%
±10V / ±400%
W1 cell main circuit voltage detection
W2 cell main circuit voltage detection
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)
±10V / ±400%V2 cell main circuit voltage detection
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)
±10V / ±400%Spare
±10V / ±400%Spare
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Remarks
Analog output & transmission sending internal data codes (4/4)
item
91 -
92 -
93 -
94 -
95 -
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
96 ±10V / ±400%PID command
Unit amount is ±32000/±400% when selected as sending internal data.
Note 1) Default unit amount when AO gain is 1 time and offset is 0 %.
97 ±10V / ±400%
98 ±10V / ±400%
PID detection
PID input
99 -Spare
90 -Spare
5-4
Default unit amount (Note 1)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No
5–2 DI (X terminal) function selection data codes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
Item
Function unassigned
Emergency stop
Forward revolution command
Reverse revolution command
External Major fault
External Minor fault
External Middle fault
External fault reset
Pulse off
Spare
AI/DI frequency command change
Ai input change
Ai frequency command polarity change
Spare
Di inching operation change
Multistage frequency change 1
Spare
When setting No.256 to 264 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.319 to 322.
Remarks
See the list in pages of 5-7.
Abbreviated as
SYX
FWD
REV
FTA
FTB
FTC
ERST
POFF
AISEL
AICHG
AIREV
DIJOG
MNB1
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
20
Multistage frequency change 2
Multistage frequency change 3
Spare
Current limitation 2 change
Acceleration and deceleration rate 2 change
Current limitation 1 change
Transmission operation cancel
Touch panel operation cancel
PID control active
Motor 2 parameter change
See the list in pages of 5-7.
See the list in pages of 5-7.
MNB2
MNB3
LMT2
HLR2
LMT1
TROFF
TCOFF
PID
MOT2
27
28
29
30
31
Synchronous switchover command to line Synchronous switchover command from line
Inverter circuit breaker answer
Commercial power supply breaker answer
Commercial line switchover
SYA
SYB
INVA
CPSA
CPS
5-5
By setting following No. in setting No.256 to 264, relevant data are input in built-in DI. Or by setting following No. in setting No. 319 to 322, relevant data are input in DI on DIO card (optional.)
DI (X terminal) function selection data codes (1/2)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No
DI (X terminal) function selection data codes (2/2)
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
42
Item
Drawing in start command
Stop command
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
When setting No.256 to 264 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.319 to 322.
Remarks
Active only when setting No.279 = 1 .
Abbreviated as
DRAW
STOP
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
57
58
52
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
59
60
61
62
63
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
5-6
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Frequency setting
DI MNB2 MNB1
FWD 0 0
FWD 0 1
FWD 1 0
FWD 1 1
DI
REV
REV
REV
REV
DI inching frequency selection by multistage frequency changeover of 1, 2 and 3 (forward rotation)
MNB3
0
0
0
0
FWD 0 0
FWD 0 1
FWD 1 0
FWD 1 1
1
1
1
1
MNB2 MNB1
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
MNB3
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
1
1
1
1
REV
REV
REV
REV
DI inching frequency selection by multistage frequency changeover of 1, 2 and 3 (reverse rotation)
Selected frequency
Forward rotation inching frequency
Forward rotation frequency 2
Forward rotation frequency 3
Forward rotation frequency 4
Forward rotation frequency 5
Forward rotation frequency 6
Forward rotation frequency 7
Forward rotation frequency 8
Selected frequency
Reverse rotation inching frequency
Reverse rotation frequency 2
Reverse rotation frequency 3
Reverse rotation frequency 4
Reverse rotation frequency 5
Reverse rotation frequency 6
Reverse rotation frequency 7
Reverse rotation frequency 8
Input signal
Setting No.
9
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Setting No.
10
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Frequency settingInput signal
5-7
- - INR-HJ5235-E
129
130
Bypass circuit breaker synchronous switchover ReadyInverter breaker synchronous switchover Ready
0
0
5–3 DO (Y terminal) function data codes
0 0
1
Releasing brake
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
In pulse on
In SS & pulse on
In operation
Major fault 2
Middle fault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault
Transmission status
Reset command
Spare
Charging completion
Electrical condition ready
Operation preparation completed
In searching
Searching completed
Frequency attained
Frequency lower limitation attained
Frequency upper limitation attained
In computing motor overload
In computing inverter overload
In computing overload
10 Minor fault 2
26
27
28
Spare
Synchronous completion
Synchronous fault
0
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
110
126
127
128
SS
PONX
FTH2
FTM
FTL1
FTL1 or FTL2
RSTX
ERD
COP
FTL2
When setting No.265 to 270 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.323 to 330. Moreover, when setting DO number added with +100 in AO output setting (No.225 to 232), ON (10V) or OFF (0 V) of the relevant data can be output to AO.
TST
29
30
10V / ON
10V / ON
5-8
By setting following No. into setting No.265 to 270, relevant data are output to built-in DO. Or by setting following No. into setting No.323 to 330, relevant data are output to DO on DIO card (optional).
DO (Y terminal) function data codes (1/4)
No. ItemUnit amount
when AO selected
No. when AO selected
Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
31
32
Synchronous reactive voltage command attainment output
Motor 2 operation
33 Circuit breaker answer back output
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
131
132
133
DI fault
DO (Y terminal) function data codes (2/4)
34 Circuit breaker answer back output(off-delay)
35 In AVR
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Spare
In OVL
In deceleration
Printed circuit board temperature alarm output
In emergency stop
In current limitation
In slip limitation
DC current braking
In acceleration & deceleration
Frequency command "zero"
Frequency command issued
In instantaneous power interruption operation continuity
Thyristor on
In changing carrier frequency
Synchronous slip limitation
In processing synchronous switchover to/from line
In PLL actuating
In instantaneous power interruption pulse off processing
Control instantaneous power interruption
Line instantaneous power interruption
Cell control power supply lowering
Power supply normal output
44 In AVR saturation
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
144
When setting No.265 to 270 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.323 to 330. Moreover, when setting DO number added with +100 into AO output setting (No.225 to 232), ON (10V) or OFF (0 V) of the relevant data can be output to AO.
60 Commercial mode 10V / ON160
5-9
No. ItemUnit amount
when AO selected
No. when AO selected
Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
61 In transmission operation 10V / ON161
62
63
In touch panel operation
In DI/AI operation
64 In PID control
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
162
163
DI-RUN
No. Item
DO (Y terminal) function data codes (3/4)
65 Spare
66 Transmission SY1
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
76
77
78
79
80
Transmission PON
MCRN(Input circuit breaker) On command
Spare
DI-FWD
DI-REV
Spare
Over current
Overload
Over heating of cooling fins and control PCB
Optical link fault
Fuse blown
Spare
75 Over voltage
Unit amount when AO selected
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
No. when AO selected
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
175
176
177
178
179
180
174
Remarks
When setting No.265 to 270 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.323 to 330. Moreover, when setting DO number added with +100 into AO output setting (No.225 to 232), ON (10V) or OFF (0 V) of the relevant data can be output to AO.
81
82
83
84
86
87
88
89
90
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
85 Spare
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
181
182
183
185
186
187
188
189
190
184
5-10
- - INR-HJ5235-E
DO (Y terminal) function data codes (4/4)
When setting No.265 to 270 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.323 to 330. Moreover, when setting DO number added with +100 into AO output setting (No.225 to 232), ON (10V) or OFF (0 V) of the relevant data can be output to AO.
91
92
93
94
96
97
98
99
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
95 Spare
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
10V / ON
191
192
193
195
196
197
198
199
194
5-11
No. ItemUnit amount
when AO selected
No. when AO selected
Remarks
- - INR-HJ5235-E
5-4 Internal digital data indication
Internal digital data(1/4)
380
Start-up condition
Electrical condition unready
Parameter items are not set
Optical link error
Instantaneous power interruption
Line instantaneous power interruption
Charging imperfect
Major fault 1
Major fault 2
Middle & Minor fault
Transmission abnormal
In DI error continuing
Pulse off command existent
etc.(Emergency stop input or Test mode)
External electrical condition unready
No inverter breaker answer
No breaker answer
No. Item
381
External input 1
External electrical condition
Spare
Circuit breaker answer
Operation command
External reset
Fan/temperature system Major fault
Fan/temperature system Minor fault
Ground fault detection input
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Abbrev.
ERD
UNSET
LNK
PWRL
MPWRL
Charge
FTH1
FTH2
FTML
TER
DIERR
POFF
etc.
RD
MC_INV
MCRN
RD
MCRN
RUN
ERST
FANH
FANL
OVG
No. Item Abbrev. Remarks
"1" : unready
"1" : no setting item existent
"1" :abnormal"1" : instantaneous power interruption"1" :line instantaneous power interruption
"1" : imperfect
"1" : fault occurrence
"1" : fault occurrence
"1" : fault occurrence
"1" : abnormal
"1" : continuing
"1" : command existent
"1" : emergency stop
"1" : non
"1" : non
"1" : no switching on
Remarks
The ON or OFF condition of DI and DO data can be confirmed with No. 380s on touch panel and loader.The touch panel indicates such way as ■:1 (ON) or □:0 (OFF.)
(Example : ■ FTH ・・・・・FTH(Major fault) is ON)
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
The touch panel indicates such way as ■:1 (ON) or □:0 (OFF.)
5-12
- - INR-HJ5235-E
382
External input 2
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
Spare
Spare
X11
X12
X13
X14
No. Item
Spare
383
External output 1
Electrical condition ready
Spare
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y11
Y12
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
Y13
Remarks
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X11
X12
X13
X14
Abbrev.
ERD
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
The touch panel indicates such way as ■:1 (ON) or □:0 (OFF.)
5-13
Internal digital data(2/4)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
385
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
The touch panel indicates such way as ■:1 (ON) or □:0 (OFF.)
5-14
Frequency command selected
Transmission operation mode selection
Loader and touch panel operation modes selection
Ai/Di operation mode selection
PID operation mode selection
Synchronous operation mode selection
Spare
AI frequency command selection 1
AI frequency command selection 2
AI frequency command selection 3
DI inching frequency operation selection
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
DI up and down operation selection
PLC
TEST
SINGL
PID
CPS
AI1
AI2
AI3
DI-N
DI-UP
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
384
Startup condition item "etc ". Display
When the ACR CPU software is being written .."1"
Emergency stop input
PWM test mode input
Local CTR test mode input
ACR CPU malfunction
PDU CPU malfunction
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
SYX
PWM-T
SLV-T
ACR-W
PDU-W
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
When the PDU CPU software is being written .."1"
Internal digital data(3/4)
- - INR-HJ5235-E5-15
No. Item
387
Cell DI error
RemarksAbbrev.
U1 Cell DI error
U2 Cell DI error
V1 Cell DI error
V2 Cell DI error
W1 Cell DI error
W2 Cell DI error
U3 Cell DI error
Spare
V3 Cell DI error
Spare
Spare
Spare
W3 Cell DI error
U1 ER
U2 ER
V1 ER
V2 ER
W1 ER
W2 ER
U3 ER
U4 ER
V3 ER
V4 ER
W4 ER
W3 ER
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
The touch panel indicates such way as ■:1 (ON) or □:0 (OFF.)
386
Detection of cell control power supply lowering
U1 cell control power supply lowering
U2 cell control power supply lowering
V1 cell control power supply lowering
V2 cell control power supply lowering
W1 cell control power supply lowering
W2 cell control power supply lowering
U3 cell control power supply lowering
Spare
V3 cell control power supply lowering
Spare
Spare
Spare
W3 cell control power supply lowering
U1 PF
U2 PF
V1 PF
V2 PF
W1 PF
W2 PF
U3 PF
U4 PF
V3 PF
V4 PF
W4 PF
W3 PF
BIT 0 MSB
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
BIT 9
BIT A
BIT B
BIT C
BIT D
BIT E
BIT F LSB
Spare V5 PF
Spare U5 PF
Spare W5 PF
Spare U5 ER
Spare V5 ER
Spare W5 ER
Internal digital data(4/4)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
5–5 Actual-Value Notation Dada Indication
No. Item Loader unit amount Remarks
401 ±32000 / ±400%
402 ±32000 / ±400%
403 ±32000 / ±400%
404 ±32000 / ±400%
405
406 ±32000 / ±400%
407 ±32000 / ±400%
Actual data (1/4)
408 ±32000 / ±400%
409 ±32000 / ±400%
411 ±32000 / ±400%
412 ±32000 / ±400%
413 ±32000 / ±400%
414
415
416
417 ±32000 / ±400%
418
419 ±32000 / ±400% 100% / motor rated voltage
420 ±32000 / ±400% 100% / motor rated voltage
421 ±32000 / ±400%
422 ±32000 / ±400%
423 ±32000 / ±400%
424 ±32000 / ±400%
425 ±32000 / ±400%
410 ±32000 / ±400%
426 ±32000 / ±400%
427 ±32000 / ±400%
428 ±32000 / ±400%
429 ±32000 / ±400%
430 ±32000 / ±400%
Unit amount is indicated in [%] on the touch panel.Both unit amount [%] and data of ±32000 are indicated on the loader.
Inverter internal actual value data can be referred on the touch panel and loader (optional).The same data can be output to AO by subtracting 400 from No. in following table and setting it into data setting (No.225 to 232)of AO.
5-16
Frequency setting value
Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) input
Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) output
Frequency command filter output
Spare
Voltage command (after base processing)
Voltage command (after pattern processing)Voltage command (after compensation)Magnetic flux command before compensation
Magnetic flux command filter outputMagnetic flux command (AVR input)
Magnetic flux command (ACR)
Voltage command
Spare
Output voltage estimation filter inputOutput voltage estimation filter output
AVR output
Active current Iq command
Reactive current Id command
Frequency command
Frequency command (ACR)
Magnetic flux command (after boost addition)
Slip frequency
Current limitation (Forward side)
Current limitation (Reverse side)
AVR output limitation (Forward side)AVR output limitation (Reverse side)
Spare
Spare
Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Loader unit amount Remarks
Actual data (2/4)
Item
431 ±32000 / ±400%
432
433 ±32000 / ±400%
434 ±32000 / ±400%
435 ±32000 / ±400%
436 ±32000 / ±400%
437 ±32000 / ±400%
438 ±32000 / ±400% Overload at 0%
439 ±32000 / ±400% Overload at 0%
441 ±32000 / ±400%
442 ±32000 / ±400%
443
444 ±32000 / ±400% 100% / motor rated voltage
445
446 ±32000 / ±400%
447 ±32000 / ±400%
448 ±32000 / ±400%
449 ±32000 / ±400%
450 ±32000 / ±400%
451 ±32000 / ±400%
452 ±32000 / ±400% 100%/Inverter rated capacity (Note 1)
453 ±32000 / ±400%
454 ±32000 / ±400%
455 ±32000 / ±400%
440 ±32000 / ±400%
456 ±32000 / ±400%
457 ±32000 / ±400%
458 ±32000 / ±400%
459
Unit amount is indicated in [%] on the touch panel.Both unit amount [%] and data of ±32000 are indicated on the loader.
5-17
After frequency command filter (ACR)
Spare
Active current Iq detection
Reactive current Id detection
Output current detection (motor converted)
Current limitation regulator input
Current limitation regulator output
Motor overload allowance
Inverter overload allowance
R1 compensation amount (reactive current component)
AI input value
Spare
Output voltage estimation
Spare
Active voltage Vq command
Reactive voltage Vd command
Voltage command
λ compensation value
AVR input
Output current detection (inverter converted)
Inverter output power
U1 cell main circuit voltage detection
U2 cell main circuit voltage detection
V1 cell main circuit voltage detection
R1 compensation amount (active current component)
Spare
Note 1) The value of the inverter ratings capacity is assumed to be 100%. (The unit is disregarded. )The example: When you show 50% inverter output electric power of Ao52 with 1250kVA inverter device 1250×50%=625kW ← When is calculated, the unit is disregarded.
Note 2) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening with a main circuit voltage of the cell charged.
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)
Spare
U3 cell main circuit voltage detection
Spare
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 2)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Loader unit amount Remarks
Actual data (3/4)
Item
461
±32000 / ±400%
462
±32000 / ±400%
463
±32000 / ±400%
464
±32000 / ±400%
465
±32000 / ±400%466
±32000 / ±400%467
±32000 / ±400%
468
±32000 / ±400%
Unit amount is indicated in [%] on the touch panel.Both unit amount [%] and data of ±32000 are indicated on the loader.
469
±32000 / ±400%
470
±32000 / ±400%
471
±32000 / ±400%
472
±32000 / ±400%
473
±32000 / ±400%
474
±32000 / ±400%
475
476
±32000 / ±400% 100% / rated voltage
477
±32000 / ±400% 100% / No.2 setting value
460
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
±32000 / ±400%
±32000 / ±400%
±32000 / ±400%
±32000 / ±400%
±32000 / ±400%
100%/100℃, range :-40℃ to 110℃
5-18
V3 cell main circuit voltage detection
Spare
W3 cell main circuit voltage detection
Spare
Main phase circuit voltage detection (average value)
Main phase circuit voltage detection (Max. value)
Main phase circuit voltage detection (Min. value)
Analog frequency command
DI frequency command
PID output
R1 computed value
ON-delay compensation computed value
Spare
Line voltage detection
Line frequency detection
Line active voltage detection
Line reactive voltage detection
Spare
Main controller temperature detection
Cell cooling fins temperature detection (Max. value)
Selected cell cooling fins temperature detection
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Note 1) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening with a main circuit voltage of the cell charged.
Note 2) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening.
100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 1)
100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 1)
100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 1)
100%/100℃ range of +10℃ to +110℃(Note 2)100%/100℃ cell selection by setting No.250 (Note 2)
W1 cell main circuit voltage detection
W2 cell main circuit voltage detection
V2 cell main circuit voltage detection
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 1)
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 1)
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 1)±32000 / ±400%
±32000 / ±400%
Spare
±32000 / ±400%Spare
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 1)
100%/3000Vdc(P-M, M-N added value)(Note 1)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Loader unit amount Remarks
Actual data (4/4)
Item
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
±32000 / ±400%
498
±32000 / ±400%
499
±32000 / ±400%
490
Unit amount is indicated in [%] on the touch panel.Both unit amount [%] and data of ±32000 are indicated on the loader.
5-19
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
PID command
PID detection
PID input
Spare
Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Chapter 6 Transmission Data
6-1
< Outline >MICREX and the inverter are connected with others by transmission with the option card corresponding to three kinds of transmission, and the change in a monitor of the state of the bit data the fault besides the operation of the drive stop and in the inverter and in the inverter etc. and various parameters becomes possible from the distance in bulk though the drive stop of the inverter is possible from a touch panel, a special loader, analogue + DI instruction, and the DI instruction.
Option card and transmission which becomes possible・D-LINE and T-LINK can transmit with DSM card.
D-LINE transmission corresponds to 14 word transmission by nine words. T-LINK transmission corresponds to 4+4 word transmission by 8+8 words.
・PROFIBUS can transmit with PSB card. It corresponds to DP V0 and DP V1 of PROFIBUS DP. PPO type 1-5 is supported in accordance with PROFIDRIVE Ver.3.
・Modbus can transmit(Half duplex transmission by RS-485) with MOD card. It corresponds to the Modbus RTU mode (ASCII mode uncorresponds).
Display the sending and receiving data of MICREX(PLC) by 600-799 of the touch panel and loaders (option). The value to No.723-739 shows the data to the MICREX→ inverter and maintain it to control power supply reset after receiving data. In the touch panel, the value can be referred to with M05 Transmission.
- - INR-HJ5235-E
6-1 PROFIBUS transmission
6-1-1.Baud-rate (transmission speed)Baud-rate of profibus-DP-network is designated at the setting of master (PLC), and on same line, only one baud-rate can be used.In side of PSB (side of drive), it isn't necessary to setting baud rate, because there is automatic baud rate detection function at PSB-board (profibus transmission board).In this device, The baud rate from 9.6kBPS to 12MBPS is supported.
6-1-2.TerminatorEnd-node of profibus-DP network should insert terminator, for prevent reflection on the bus-line. This can be switched by using the terminator-switch of connector side.
The node in the terminal (PSB card of drive) is always recommended to turn on the power supply. if other node (drive or other device) use with turn off the control-source of drive of terminal, put in the active-terminater at the terminal.
6-1-3.Node-addressThe node-address is set by the setting-item (the control transmission slave-address) of drive-side.
6-1-4.PPO-type selectThe node-address is set by the setting-item (the control transmission slave-address) of drive-side.In this device, PPO from 1 to 5 is supported and data is allocated as follows.
PPO1
PPO2
PPO3
PPO4
PPO5
PKE
PKE
PKE PZD10
PZD6
PZD6
PKW PZD
IND -
IND -
IND -
PWE
PWE
PWE
PZD1 PZD2
PZD1 PZD2
PZD1 PZD2
PZD1 PZD2
PZD1 PZD2
PZD3 PZD4 PZD5
PZD3 PZD4 PZD5
PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 ・・・
6-1-5.notandumIf you connect the profidrive-matching device including this device in the MELSEC, the following notes are reported. In "Slave Modules" that sets the PPO type, three of reserved is inserted in "installed Module".Ex.: "installed Module" when PP5 is set
[000] reserved[001] reserved[002] reserved[003] PPO5 : 4 PKW 10 PZD
It is necessary to do byte-swap.
6-2
- - INR-HJ5235-E
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
PZD receivebuffer
PZD receive allocation(IND number)
610
620
Profibus card(PSB card)
PZDData
PKWData
(PPO1,2,5)
parameter request
(Message communicatio
n byDP-V1)
ProfibusTransmission line
630
631
632
633
634
635
PKW receive(transformed by PSB)
Change with crach byPNU=915IND=1~10
600
601
STW1
STW2
604SPW
640 NSOLL_A (V*)
646
647
661
662
663
1
IND
3
5
127
112
113
131
132
133
T_AC (Tac)
T_DC (Tdc)
RCH_L
DEV_L
DEV_T
PLC_EN(STW1)
Writing byPNU=800IND=1~399
6-1-6.flow of receive-data (PLC→DDC)The flow of receive data is shown below. Value of 600s is the display numbers.
To transmission data
6-3
trans-form
- - INR-HJ5235-E
6-1-7.flow of transmission-data(DDC→PLC)The flow of transmission data is shown below. Value of 600s is the display numbers.
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
PZD transmissionbuffer
PZD transmission allocation
(IND number)
680
Profibus card(PSB card)
PZDData
PKWData
(PPO1,2,5)
Parameter request
(Message communica
tion byDP-V1)
ProfibusTransmission
line
700
701
702
703
704
705
PKW receive(transformed by PSB)
Change with crach byPNU=916
IND=1~10
670
671
ZSW1
ZSW2
2
IND
4
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
690
157
158
301
FLT1
FLT2
399
・・・
from receive data
772
773
Analog-output data-code 1
Analog-output data-code 99
・・・
Reading byPNU=800
IND=1~399
Please refer to the explanation of 670, 671, 772, 773 for a detailed output of ZSW1, ZSW2, FLT1, FLT2.
6-4
trans-form
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-5
Note)Interlock having
J
ACR
PLC_EN
JOG_-
JOG_+
ACKN
SET_EN
RFG_ST
RFG_EN
INV_EN
~OFF3
~OFF2
ON
SS active timer short circuit command
AVR active timer short-circuit command
The command from PLC is valid.
Operating command with the inching frequency 2 (when bit9=bitA=bitB=0)
Operating command with the inching frequency 1 (when bit9=bitA=bitB=0)
Reset of the failure at the booting edge
0: HLR input = 0 (stop at normal deceleration rate)
1: HLR input = velocity command value
0:HLR operation stop, 1:HLR active
0:HLR output =0, 1:HLR possible to output
0: pulse off, interruption of free-run,1: pulse on (when bit0=bit1=bit2=1 & RNMC: on)
0: RNMC off after stopping with rapid deceleration rate.1: RNMC is ON condition.
0: free-run stop with pulse off & RNMC: off.1: RNMC is ON condition.
0: RNMC off after stopping with normal deceleration rate.1: RNMC is ON condition.
Spare
It is necessary when driving from PROFIBUS by two procedures or more (Three following procedures are recommended).
1."0406" is set in control word 1, and it is assumed the state of the switch on preparation(turn on RD_SW). 2.Set "0407" in control word 1, and turn on MCRN(turn on RD_OP). …… It is possible to omit it. 3.Set "047F" in control word 1, and drive according to the frequency command. (turn on OP_E)
Note) "0406" is set without fail because there is interlock (~OFF2,~OFF3) in MCRN turning on (ON), and it is necessary to put "ON" bit afterwards.
6-1-8 PROFIBUS transmissoin data
Refer since 6-15 pages excluding the PROFIBUS transmission.
6-1-8-1 Control word
600
PSB:STW1 (Control word 1)
No. Item Abbrev. Remarks
601
PSB:STW2 (Control word 2)
No. Item Abbrev. Remarks
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-6
604 PSB:Receiving Specification bit
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
605 PSB:Specification bit receiving flag
6-1-8-2 Specification bit
A specified bit with the above-mentioned becomes effective when data is received and specified bit is on.
604605
Spare
Acceleration rate
Deceleration rate
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Impossible to use.
Impossible to use.
△Nac
△Ndc
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-7
610 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 1
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
PZD_S1
619 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 10 PZD_S10
The number of receive data is different because of receive data (PZD) updated every transmission refreshing cycle according to the PPO type (specification from PLC). PPO1,3・・・2wordPPO2,4・・・6wordPPO5・・・10word
620
No. Remarks
6-1-8-3 Receive data(PZD)
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
PSB:Receive data allocation 1
Item
PSB:Receive data allocation 2
PSB:Receive data allocation 3
PSB:Receive data allocation 4
PSB:Receive data allocation 5
PSB:Receive data allocation 6
PSB:Receive data allocation 7
PSB:Receive data allocation 8
PSB:Receive data allocation 9
PSB:Receive data allocation 10
Default
1
5
0
3
0
0
112
113
0
0
Abbr.
STW1
NSOLL_A
STW2
T_AC
T_DC
No.
The allocation of receive data (PZD) is displayed. The initial value by power supply reset : as shown in the table on. The allocation can change by PKE=915 and IND=1-10.
611 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 2 PZD_S2
612 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 3 PZD_S3
613 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 4 PZD_S4
614 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 5 PZD_S5
615 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 6 PZD_S6
616 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 7 PZD_S7
617 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 8 PZD_S8
618 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 9 PZD_S9
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-8
630 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 1
No. Item RemarksContents
R. ID
Parameter receive data (PKW) is transmitted by the handshake with the following1.Transmission by PPO type 1, 2, and 5 in DP-V0/V1 always2.The parameter request by DP-V1.
It is shared in the format of the above-mentioned with the PSB card though the transmission format of both is different.
R.R. Request RefereNCs 01H~0FFHR.ID Request ID 01H(Read) , 02H(Write)Attr. Attribute 10HNo.El. No. of Elements 01HPKE ParameTER Number 0001H~0FFFFHIND SubiNDex 0000H~0FFFFHPWE1 Values H 0000H~0FFFFHPWE2 Values L 0000H~0FFFFH
6-1-8-4 Receive data(PKW)
R.R.
631 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 2 No.El.Attr.
632 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 3 PKE
633 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 4 IND
634 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 5 PWE1
635 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 6 PWE2
Reference: PKW transmission format by PPO type 1, 2, and 5
PKE Parameter
Abbr. Contents Remarks
AK+SPM+PNU
IND Sub index
PWE1 Data (Upper word)
PWE2 Data (Lower word)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SPMAK PNU(Parameter number)
0 No-request
ID Function Res.
0
AK (Request)
Request for a parameter value
Change of the parameter value (Word)
Change of the parameter value (Long Word)
1,21
2
3
1
2
AK (Response)
0
ID
1
2
7
8
Response of the parameter value (Word)
Response of the parameter value (Long Word)
No-response
Refusal of the request (return a error number)
Function
No right to change the parameter by PKW interface
Receive data table (1/2)
AK: Request/ Response ID (0 to 15)
SPM: A toggle bit for self-active messages (not-used)
PNU: Parameter number (0 to 1999)
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-9
No.
640
641
Item
PSB:Frequency command F*
Range
-200.0 ~ 200.0
Unit
%
642
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
RemarksUnit amount
4000H/100%
Spare
661 PSB:Frequency attainment comparator level -400.0 ~ 400.0 %
662 PSB:Control deflection comparator level 0.0 ~ 400.0 %
1000/100%
1000/100%
663 PSB:Control deflection confirmation timer 0 ~ 9999 ms 1/1ms
Spare643
644 Spare
658
Spare659
Spare660
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Receive data table (2/2)
0 ~ 655.35
0 ~ 655.35 s
s 100/1s
100/1s
PSB : Acceleration rate (T_AC)
PSB : Deceleration rate (T_DC)
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-10
PSB:ZSW1 (Status word 1)
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
INI
ERDX
SSX
REACH
CTL_R
NO_DEV
ALM
IH_SW
NO_OFF3
NO_OFF2
FLT
OP_E
RD_OP
RD_SW
670
6-1-8-5 Status word
Initial completion (set to “1” if receiving Sending command Word”)
Electrical condition come into effective.
Under operation
Frequency reaches the normal value.
PLC control is available.
A great control deviation is detected.
Alarm (light failure, moderate failure)
Prohibition of ON
OFF3 (ContorolWord answer)
OFF2 (ContorolWord answer)
Heavy failure (1, 2)
Under pulse-on
Completion of the preparation
Completion of the preparation for ON
PSB:ZSW2 (Status word 2)
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
NB3
NB2
NB1
HLRZ
ACC
SAT
671
Internal Bit3 (cf. The Inverter Instruction Manuals)
Internal Bit2 (cf. The Inverter Instruction Manuals)
Internal Bit1 (cf. The Inverter Instruction Manuals)
HLR output: zero
HLR under acceleration or deceleration
Under current limiting
Spare
Spare
Selection by setting No.185
Selection by setting No.186
Selection by setting No.187
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-11
680 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 1
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
PZD_A1
689 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 10 PZD_A10
The number of transmission data is different because of transmission data (PZD) updated every transmission refreshing cycle according to the PPO type (specification from PLC). PPO1,3・・・2wordPPO2,4・・・6wordPPO5・・・10word
690
6-1-8-6 Sending data(PZD)
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
PSB:Sending data allocation 1
PSB:Sending data allocation 2
PSB:Sending data allocation 3
PSB:Sending data allocation 4
PSB:Sending data allocation 5
PSB:Sending data allocation 6
PSB:Sending data allocation 7
PSB:Sending data allocation 8
PSB:Sending data allocation 9
PSB:Sending data allocation 10
2
303
51
4
0
0
0
0
157
158
ZSW1
NIST_A
MIST
ZSW2
-
-
-
FLT1
FLT2
The allocation of transmission data (PZD) is displayed. The initial value by power supply reset : as shown in the table on. The allocation can change by PKE=916 and IND=1-10.
681 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 2 PZD_A2
682 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 3 PZD_A3
683 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 4 PZD_A4
684 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 5 PZD_A5
685 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 6 PZD_A6
686 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 7 PZD_A7
687 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 8 PZD_A8
688 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 9 PZD_A9
No. RemarksItemDefault
Abbr.No.
-
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-12
700 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 1
No. Item RemarksContents
R. ID
6-1-8-7 Sending data (PKW)
R.R.
701 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 2 No.El.Attr.
702 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 3 PKE
703 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 4 IND
704 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 5 PWE1
705 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 6 PWE2
710 PSB:Reception counter
No. Item RemarksContents
6-1-8-8 RAS
Hexadecimal
711 PSB:Sending counter Hexadecimal
PSB:RAS Hexadecimal
713 PSB:Profile version Hexadecimal
777 Transmission mode0: There is no transmission, and 1: DSM, 2: Spare, 3: PSB and 4:Modbus
712
PSB CPU is operating.
DPC31 is abnormal.
Normal termination of cable check
Data is being exchanged.
RUN
S0
S1
S2
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-13
PNU
800
Item
Transmission command(control data)
Remarks
Refer to the allocation of IND to the PSB control data list.
6-1-8-9 PNU list
IND
1~399
Access
R/W
915 Sending data allocationIND corresponds to sending buffer 1-10. Refer to PWE to the PSB control data list.
1~10 R/W
916 Receive data allocationIND corresponds to reception buffer 1-10. Refer to PWE to the PSB control data list.
1~10 R/W
918 Node address- R
947Cause of the 1-8th fault this time1~8
RThe last cause of the 1-8th fault9~16
963 Baud rate
4:500kBPS6:1500kBPS7:3000kBPS8:6000kBPS9:12000kBPS
- R
965 Profile versoin- R
967 Control word 1- R
968 Status word 1- R
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-14
112
113
Acceleration rate
Deceleration rate
T_AC
T_DC R/W
R/W
127 Transmission specification word
128~130
131
Spare
Frequency attainment comparator level
SPW
RCH_L
Specified bit corresponding to No.111-126
Default=95%
R/W
R/W
132 Control deflection comparator level
133
134~150
Control deflection confirmation timer
Spare
DEV_L
DEV_T
Default=5%
Default=1s
R/W
R/W
151 Model code R
157
Spare
Fault word 1 FLT1 R
158 Fault word 2
159~255
Spare
FLT2 R
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6-1-8-10 PSB control data list
No. Item RemarksSymbol
1 Control word 1 STW1
Number of words
1
Access
R/W
2 Status word 1 ZSW1 1 R
3 Control word 2 STW2 1 R/W
4 Status word 2 ZSW2 1 R
5 Frequency command NSOLL_A 1 R/W
6~50 Spare
51 Output current IAIST 1 R
52~111 Spare
114~126
Spare
152~156
- - INR-HJ5235-E
6-2 DSM (D-LINE, T-LINK) Transmission Data and Modbus transmission
DSM transmission and Modbus transmission receiving data (1/3)
No. Item
DSM/MOD:Receiving Frequency setting F*
Spare
Range
-130.0 to 130.0
Unit
%
Spare
Spare
DSM/MOD:Receiving Acceleration rate ΔNac
DSM/MOD:Receiving Deceleration rate ΔNdc
0 to 655.35
0 to 655.35 s
s
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
RemarksUnit amount
20000/100%
100/1s
100/1s
Spare
DSM/MOD:Internal data 1 select 0 to 99
DSM/MOD:Internal data 2 select 0 to 99
DSM/MOD:Receiving Code 1
DSM/MOD:Receiving Data 1
DSM/MOD:Receiving Code 2
DSM/MOD:Receiving Data 2
Timesharing data split-second valueTimesharing data split-second valueTimesharing data split-second value
Timesharing data split-second value
Spare
Sending and receiving data from/to PLC(MICREX) are indicated on the touch panel and loader (optional) using No. of 720s.
6-15
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
DSM/MOD:Internal data 3 select 0 to 99
The switch of use and the nonuse switches a pertinent bit of specified bit (750,751,754,755) on and off in the inverter of the transmission data to No.724-725. A set value of the inverter is used when a pertinent bit of a specified bit is off, and the transmission data is used for on. (There is not a part of inverter setting but there is the one only of the transmission data. )
※Note 1: In code 1(code 2) of No.740, the Nakaue title 16 bit eight bits show code 2 when it transmits the T-LINK8+8 word is transmitted, and eight subordinate position bits show code 1. In that case, No.742 always becomes 0.
code 2 code 1No.740
Upper 8bit Lower 8bit
6-2-1 Receiving data
- - INR-HJ5235-E
DSM transmission and Modbus transmission receiving data (2/3)
748
DSM/MOD:Receiving bit 1
Synchronization 1
Spare
Spare
Spare
Forward rotation inching command
Reverse rotation inching command
Spare
Spare
AVR active timer short-circuit command
SS active timer short circuit command
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
SY1
FJ
RJ
ACR
J
749
DSM/MOD:Receiving bit 2
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Pulse on command
Fault reset command
Host transmission error
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
PON
RST
TER
6-16
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
DSM transmission and Modbus transmission receiving data (3/3)
750 DSM/MOD:Receiving Specification bit 1
Spare
Acceleration rate
Deceleration rate
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Impossible to use.
Impossible to use.
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
△Nac
△Ndc
751 DSM/MOD:Receiving Specification bit 2
750751754755
754 DSM/MOD:Specification bit 1 receiving flag
755 DSM/MOD:Specification bit 2 receiving flag
6-17
< specified bit 1 and 2>Code 1 = The value of data 1 at 90(d) becomes specified bit 1, and code 2 = The value of data 2 at 90(d) becomes specified bit 2.
< specified bit 1 and 2 reception flag >The bit which corresponds when the data which corresponds in the class of data 1 and code 1 is received stands from specified bit 1 reception flag. The bit which corresponds when the data which corresponds in the class of data 2 and code 2 is received stands from specified bit 2 reception flag. It maintains it to the transmission abnormality generation when standing once.
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
DSM transmission and Modbus transmission sending data (1/2)
DSM/MOD:Sending Frequency command Fsoll
DSM/MOD:Sending Current detection I1ist
-130.0 to 130.0
-400.0 to 400.0 %
%
Spare
Spare
Spare
No. Item Range Unit RemarksUnit amount
Acceleration/deceleration computing output
Motor rating conversion value
20000/100%
8000/100%
DSM/MOD:Send Internal data 1 -400.0 to 400.0 %
DSM/MOD:Send Internal data 2
DSM/MOD:Send Internal data 3
-400.0 to 400.0
-400.0 to 400.0 %
%
Selection by setting No.182
Selection by setting No.183
Selection by setting No.184
8000/100%
8000/100%
8000/100%
Spare
Spare
Spare
771
DSM/MOD:Sending bit 1
Initialization completion
MICREX cooperation enable
Electrical condition ready
Thyristor pulse on
Spare
Under operation
Spare
Under acceleration
Under current limitation
HLR output zero
Major fault 1
Major fault 2
Minor fault 1
Internal bit 1
Internal bit 2
Internal bit 3
Selection by setting No.185
Selection by setting No.186
Selection by setting No.187
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
INI
COPX
ERDX
CHRG
SSX
ACC/DEC
SAT
HLRZ
FTH1
FTH2
FTL1
NB1
NB2
NB3
6-18
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
6-2-2 Sending data
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
IGBT short-circuit
772
DSM/MOD:Sending Fault 1
External Minor fault
External Major fault
Ground fault
Inverter overload
Motor overload
Instantaneous power interruption
Optical link abnormal
DC fuse blown
Main circuit overvoltage
Main circuit undervoltage
Main circuit voltage unbalanced
Spare
Motor overspeed
Overcurrent
Pick-up operation unsuccesful
Including cell control power supply lowering
Including local optical link
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
FTB
FTA
OVG
OLINV
OLM
PWRL
LINK
DCF
OV
UV
UNB
OS
OC
RTRY
773
DSM/MOD:Sending Fault 2
Pulse distribution abnormal
ACR CPU abnormal
PWM optical signal abnormal
Cell cooling frame overheating
Power interruption fault
Motor start-up fault
Analog frequency setting abnormal
Synchronization fault
Circuit breaker switchover fault
Line instantaneous power interruption
Line power interruption fault
Fan/temperature system Minor fault
Fan/temperature system Major fault
External Middle fault
Spare
Transmission fault
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
PDU
A CPU
PWM
OTF
LPWRL
MLK
AI
SYNC
MCLAP
MPWRL
MLPWR
FANL
FANH
FTC
TFT
DSM transmission and Modbus transmission sending data (2/2)
When reset is not yet performed at the occurrence of a fault , the relevant bit remains to 1.
When reset is not yet performed at the occurrence of a fault , the relevant bit remains to 1.
6-19
IGBTS
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
6-2-3 Modbus sending and receivingThe Modbus transmission becomes a driving operation by T-LINK interchangeable transmission (6-2-1 receive
data and refer to data by 6-2-2 Sending data). The function code in the Modbus transmission to the T-LINK transmission is as follows. Function code No.1700-1707 is state acquisition of the inverter, and No.1708-1715 is an instruction in driving to
the inverter.
6-20
No Item Range Unit amount
1700 Receiving bit 1
Frequency command Fsoll
No.771(Refer to 6-15 page)
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
Current detection I1ist
Internal data 1
Internal data 2
Internal data 3
Receiving Fault 1
Receiving Fault 2
-26000~26000
-32000~32000
-32000~32000
-32000~32000
-32000~32000
No.772(Refer to 6-16 page)
No.772(Refer to 6-16 page)
20000d/100%
8000d/100%
Inverter setting No.182
Inverter setting No.183
Inverter setting No.184
No Item Range Unit amount
1708 Frequency setting F*
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
-26000~26000 20000d/100%
Spare
Spare
Sending bit 1 No.748(Refer to 6-13 page)
Sending bit 2 No.749(Refer to 6-13 page)
Attention:The direction of data is writing the transmission and the reception of it the PLC side
in the subject.
Data 1
Code 2No.750~755
(Refer to 6-14 page)Data 2
Code 1
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
- - INR-HJ5235-E
780
DSM:RAS
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Host transmission system normal
P(E) link healthy off
Spare
DLA abnormal
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
781
DSM:Status
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
RUN
Reception error
Overrun or Underrun
Many CRC errors occurrence
Transmission cycle overtime
Transmission frame normal
DSM setting normal
DSM memory initialization completion
No. Item RemarksAbbrev.
No. Item Remarks
782 DSM:receiving counter
DSM RAS (1/1)
6-21
6-3 Transmission RAS
777 Transmission mode
No. Item Remarks
Following No.780-782 is RAS information on the DSM card.
0: There is no transmission, 1: DSM, 2: Spare, 3: PSB and 4:Modbus
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
MSB
LSB
BIT F BIT 0
Notation1
Notation2
BIT E BIT 1
BIT D BIT 2
BIT C BIT 3
BIT B BIT 4
BIT A BIT 5
BIT 9 BIT 6
BIT 8 BIT 7
BIT 7 BIT 8
BIT 6 BIT 9
BIT 5 BIT A
BIT 4 BIT B
BIT 3 BIT C
BIT 2 BIT D
BIT 1 BIT E
BIT 0 BIT F
Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. (Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)
- - INR-HJ5235-E6-22
Modbus RAS (1/1)
No. 項 目 備 考
795 Modbus error status
796 Modbus receiving counter
POD RAS (1/1)
No. 項 目 備 考
798 POD error status
799 POD receiving counter
- - INR-HJ5235-E
No. Item Indication range Unit Remarks
901 1st cause of fault code See list of fault code (Note 1)
1) Fault causes and control data (1/1)
7–1 Fault Cause Indication
902 2nd cause of fault code Same as above
903 3rd cause of fault code Same as above
904 4th cause of fault code Same as above
905 5th cause of fault code Same as above
906 6th cause of fault code Same as above
907 7th cause of fault code Same as above
908 8th cause of fault code Same as above
909 9th cause of fault code Same as above
910 10th cause of fault code Same as above
911 11th cause of fault code Same as above
912 12th cause of fault code Same as above
913 13th cause of fault code Same as above
914 14th cause of fault code Same as above
915 15th cause of fault code Same as above
916 16th cause of fault code Same as above
917 17th cause of fault code Same as above
918 18th cause of fault code Same as above
919 19th cause of fault code Same as above
920 20th cause of fault code Same as above
When faults occurs, the maximum 20 faults data are recorded in chronological order into following No. 901 to 920. These items are kept until next fault will occur after reset of the fault.
Major fault 1
Middle fault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2
Grade
Triggers
Transmission system faults operates in different way because faults are registered after the Emergency stop (after SS off).Occurrence of faults → Immediate emergency stop
→ Major fault after stop (Immediate Pulse off is also selectable)Occurrence of faults → Emergency stop after moderate fault timer → Moderate fault after stop
Immediately pulse off,Major fault 1 Relay on
After timer, Emergency stop, Pulse off
After stop,Start-up condition vanished
Only indication
Actuation at occurrence
Fault registered, Only trace acquired
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Fault reg.
Registered
Acquired
Non
Non
Non
Trace back data
Acquired
enter
enter
enter
Not enter
Into start upcondition
Not enter
After stop
At any time
At any time
At any time
Reset condition
No reset
2) Fault grades and actuations
Major fault 2 Immediately pulse off,Major fault 2 Relay on Registered Acquired enter After stop
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.
Chapter 7 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
7-1
Note 1) The data are kept until a new fault will occur after reset of the fault . Note 2) In case that pulse-off is specified (setting No. 284 = 1) or operation continuing is specified (setting
No.284 = 2 or 3) when instantaneous power interruption is detected, the fault cause codes are overwritten if the following cause occurs again after passing 2 minutes or more after either of the following fault cause occurs. Fault code No.10 "Instantaneous power interruption",Fault code No.11 "Line instantaneous power interruption" or Fault code No.*8 "□□ cell control power supply lowering."
Note: Marked “*” is filled with cell number such as 4 to 18.
CAUTION
- - INR-HJ5235-E
1
2
Fault codes (1/8)
3
Fault codes indicated in No.901 to 920, have the meanings described in the following table .
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Recognizing method S: Software recognotion, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●
●
●
●
○
●
●
○
●
○
○
●
●
○
●
○
○
○
○
Grade
●:Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
Selection by setting No.173
Selection by setting No.173
Selection by setting No.89
Selection by setting No.284
Selection by setting No.284
Selection by setting No.173
Selection by setting No.173
H
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
S
H
H
S
S
R
R
R
R
R
R
H
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
OC
OLINV
OLM
OS
A CPU
PDU
AI
MLK
PWRL
MPWRL
MLPWR
LPWRL
MCLAP
SYNC
RTRY
FTB
FTA
FTC
OVG
FANH
FANL
OTDDC
Over-current
Inverter overload
Motor overload
Over-speed
Spare
ACR CPU error
Pulse distribution error
Analog frequency setting error
Motor start-up fault
Instantaneous power interruption
Line instantaneous power interruption
Line power fault
Power fault
Spare
Spare
Spare
Circuit breaker switching fault
Synchronous fault
Pick-up operation unsuccessful
Spare
Spare
External minor fault
External major fault
External middle fault
Ground fault
Fan/temperature system major fault
Fan/temperature system minor fault
PCB temperature abnormal
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.
7-2
7–2 Fault codes
CAUTION
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (2/8)
Recognizing method S: Software recognition, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●: Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
31
35
36
37
38
●
●
●
●
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Grade
Selection by setting No.174
Selection by setting No.174
Selection by setting No.174
Selection by setting No.174
S
S
S
S
S
●
Grade
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
40 H ●
LINK
MICRX
IFC
DLA
DLINE
Spare
Optical link error
MICREX error
Upper transmission system error
DLA error
D-LINE (T-LINK) error
U1 cell Main circuit overvoltage
U1 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
U1 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
U1 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
U1 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
U1 cell PWM optical link error
U1 cell Control power supply lowering
U1 cell Cooling unit overheating
U1 cell DC fuse blown
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
7-3
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION
34 PROFI ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPROFIBUS error
33 PSB ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPSB error
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
32 Spare
H ●IGBTS U1 cell IGBT short-circuit
30
29 R ●TRTMP Transformer overheat Major fault
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (3/8)
Recognizing method S: Software recognition, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●:Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
60 H ●
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
70
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
Grade
7-4
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
50 H ●
U2 cell Main circuit overvoltage
U2 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
U2 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
U2 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
U2 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
U2 cell PWM optical link error
U2 cell Control power supply lowering
U2 cell Cooling unit overheating
U2 cell DC fuse blown
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
H ●IGBTS U2 cell IGBT short-circuit
H ●IGBTS
U3 cell Main circuit overvoltage
U3 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
U3 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
U3 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
U3 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
U3 cell PWM optical link error
U3 cell Control power supply lowering
U3 cell Cooling unit overheating
U3 cell DC fuse blown
U3 cell IGBT short-circuit
Note : Fault No.70 to 89, 120 to 139, 170 to 189, 196, 197, 201, 202, 206, 207 is reserved.
Spare Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (4/8)
Recognizing method S: Software recognition, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●:Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
Grade
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
90 H ●
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
100 H ●
Note : Fault No.70 to 89, 120 to 139, 170 to 189, 196, 197, 201, 202, 206, 207 is reserved.
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
7-5
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
80
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
H ●IGBTS
H ●IGBTS
V1 cell Main circuit overvoltage
V1 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
V1 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
V1 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
V1 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
V1 cell PWM optical link error
V1 cell Control power supply lowering
V1 cell Cooling unit overheating
V1 cell DC fuse blown
V2 cell Main circuit overvoltage
V2 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
V2 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
V2 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
V2 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
V2 cell PWM optical link error
V2 cell Control power supply lowering
V2 cell Cooling unit overheating
V2 cell DC fuse blown
V1 cell IGBT short-circuit
V2 cell IGBT short-circuit
Spare Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (5/8)
Recognizing method S: Software recognition, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●:Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
Grade
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
120
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
130
V3 cell Main circuit overvoltage
V3 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
V3 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
V3 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
V3 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
V3 cell PWM optical link error
V3 cell Control power supply lowering
V3 cell Cooling unit overheating
V3 cell DC fuse blown
7-6
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
110 H ●
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
H ●IGBTS V3 cell IGBT short-circuit
Note : Fault No.70 to 89, 120 to 139, 170 to 189, 196, 197, 201, 202, 206, 207 is reserved.
Spare Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (6/8) Grade
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
150 H ●
Recognizing method S: Software recognition, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●:Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
7-7
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
140 H ●
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
W3 cell Main circuit overvoltage
W3 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
W3 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
W3 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
W3 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
W3 cell PWM optical link error
W3 cell Control power supply lowering
W3 cell Cooling unit overheating
W3 cell DC fuse blown
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
H ●IGBTS
W3 cell IGBT short-circuit
H ●IGBTS
W2 cell Main circuit overvoltage
W2 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
W2 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
W2 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
W2 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
W2 cell PWM optical link error
W2 cell Control power supply lowering
W2 cell Cooling unit overheating
W2 cell DC fuse blown
W1 cell Main circuit overvoltage
W1 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage
W1 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M
W1 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N
W1 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance
W1 cell PWM optical link error
W1 cell Control power supply lowering
W1 cell Cooling unit overheating
W1 cell DC fuse blown
W1 cell IGBT short-circuit
W2 cell IGBT short-circuit
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.284
S
S
S
S
S
S
H
S
●
●
●
●
●
●
160 H ●
OV
OVDEC
UV PM
UV MN
UNB
PWM
PWRL
OTF
DCF
H ●IGBTS
Note : Fault No.70 to 89, 120 to 139, 170 to 189, 196, 197, 201, 202, 206, 207 is reserved.
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (7/8) Grade
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
180
Recognizing method S: Software recognition, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●:Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
7-8
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
170
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
Note : Fault No.70 to 89, 120 to 139, 170 to 189, 196, 197, 201, 202, 206, 207 is reserved.
Spare Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (8/8)
The code in the following table is not fault. As trace back data is adopted, however, it is indicated by No.901 to 920 alike faults.
211 Loader remote trigger S
RemarksFault code
Fault name
When triggered from a long distance with Loader (PF6).EXTTG
Touch panel code
7-9
Grade
Recognizing method S: Software recognition, H: Hardware recognition, R: External relay contact input
●:Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting
193 S ●LLINK U1 cell Local optical link error
194 S ●LLINK U2 cell Local optical link error
195 S ●LLINK
V1 cell Local optical link error
196
V2 cell Local optical link error
197
W1 cell Local optical link error
198 S ●LLINK
W2 cell Local optical link error
199 S ●LLINK
U3 cell Local optical link error
200 S ●LLINK
201
V3 cell Local optical link error
202
203 S ●LLINK
W3 cell Local optical link error
204 S ●LLINK
Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
205 S ●LLINK
206
207
Note : Fault No.70 to 89, 120 to 139, 170 to 189, 196, 197, 201, 202, 206, 207 is reserved.
Spare Spare
Spare Spare
Spare Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (1/21)
1 ●HOC Over-current
[Contents] It is output when the peak value of the output current has exceeded the over-current actuation level.
The instantaneous actuation occurs when at least 137% of current has flowed in terms of rms intensity
depending on the ripple factor (determined by motor constant) of the output current.
[Cause]①Output short circuited ②Current regulator abnormal ③Abrupt acceleration/deceleration mode operation
[Check and Remedy]
① If the current increases abruptly immediately before the trip point, an output short circuit is suspected.
Check whether the motor proper or cable is short circuited. If it occurs concurrently with "DC fuse blown" in
fault code No. *1, or "AC fuse blown" in fault code No. *2, IGBT is probably broken and the inverter unit may
have to be replaced. (Note: Marks"*"are filled with 4 to 18 corresponded to cells).
② If it occurs concurrently with fault code No.6 "ACR CPU error" or No.7 "Pulse distribution error," Over-current
due to abnormality of the CPU regulating current or abnormality of the CPU distributing pulse has occurred.
It is required to replace a control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) or a control stack (RKJS1SXK-
□□□□□).
③ If it occurred concurrently with fault code No.*7 "CellPWM optical signal abnormal," it is a optical signal error
between the optical converting unit PCB in the control stack and the inverter.
(Note: Marks“*”are filled with 4 to 18 corresponded to cells.)
Check the connection condition of the optical cable between the optical converting unit PCB (CDJC1EOK-
□□□□□, see pages of 2-11 to 14) and the inverter corresponded to the fault code.
If the connection condition of the optical cable is normal, it is required to replace the optical converting unit
PCB (CDJC1EOK-□□□□□, see pages of 2-11 to 14) or the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□)
corresponded to the fault code.
④ Check whether setting values, by setting No.99 to 102, No.111 to 113 and No.135 to 141, of the inverter are
input with setting values in the examination report.
2 ●SOLINV Inverter overload
[Contents] It is output when an overload of the output current has been detected (when more than the rated current of the inverter flowed continuously). The computation starts when the rated current has been exceeded. An inverter overload is assumed at such as ;
105% current for 60 seconds or 120% current for 60 seconds
[Check and remedy]
① Check whether output current of inverter during operation has been beyond 100%, in comparison to the actual value data No.451 "Output current detection (inverter conversion)". If it exceeds 100%, lower the load on the motor.(Study to adjust valve opening or reduce operation frequency.) If the load can not be reduced, it is required to use larger capacity of the inverter.
7-10
7–3 Fault code details (Explanation of fault codes)
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (2/21)
4 ● ○ Sellection by setting No.173SOS Over-speed
With the digit in setting No.173 to 100, fault levels such as Major fault 2 and minorfault 1 can be selected (see page of 4-41.)
[Contents] It is detected when the output frequency of the inverter has been beyond 120% of therated value.
[Causes]① The inverter output frequency has increased because the slip frequency was excessively compensated on account of an excessive load.
② The speed was excessive when a rotated motor was subjected to a drawing operation.
[Check and remedy]
① Check the load and motor conditions.② Check whether setting values, in setting No.135 to 141,of the inverter are
recorded with setting values in the examination report.
6 S ●A CPU ACR CPU Error
[Contents] It actuates when no interruption from CPU for ACR for a given length of time.
[Causes] Hardwares such as CPU and clock are abnormal.
[Remedy] The CPU for current control or the peripheral circuits is abnormal.It is required to replace the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) or thecontrol stack (RKJS1SXY-□□□□□.)
3 ● ○ ○Sellection by setting No.173SOLM Motor overload
With digits in setting No.173-1000, Major fault 1, Major fault 2, Moderate fault, Minor fault 1 and Minor fault 2 can be selected (see page of 4-41.)
[Contents] It is output when an overload of the output current has been detected,when a current greater than by setting No. 169[358] flowed longer than the time determined by settinng No. 170[359], No. 171[360].)
Note)Set No. in [ ] is a set number when "Motor 2" is selected.
[Causes]① If the motor speed is normal, the motor capacity is poor.② If a trip has occurred while the motor speed hardly rises, GD2 of the load may be so large
that the excessive acceleration current of the motor exceeds the allowable load factor.
[Check and remedy]① Check whether setting values,by setting No.169 to 171,131 (Set No. 358-361 is a set number when
"Motor 2" is selected.)of the inverter are recorded with setting values in the examination report.② Check whether the setting of overload level is met with the motor protection level.
If it does not correspond to the check-up items in ① to ②, reduce the motor load.(Study to adjust the valve opening or reduce the operation frequency)If impossible to reduce the load, it is required to use the larger capacity of the motor.
7-11
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (3/21)
8
9
○
●
○ Selection by setting No.89S
S
AI
MLK
Analog frequency setting error
Motor start-up fault
When abnormal, processing patterns are selectable by setting No.89 (see page of 4-28.)
[Contents]If analog frequency setting decreased rapidly (more than the rate set by No.90 during 10 ms), a fault is output.This failure is not detected when momentary power interruption detection or period of 100ms after power returned.
[Causes]Disconnection of analog frequency setting wire, analog converter error.
[Check and remedy]① Check the operation condition whether the analog frequency setting input in the
inverter has been beyond the above setting values.② Check the analog frequency setting wiring ( connection condition of the insulated
converter and the Relay unit.)③ Check whether analog converter actuates normally. Moreover, it is required to restore
the output of the analog converter (output is not zero) within 100ms after momentarypower interruption.
If it does not actuate normally, it is required to replace the analog converter. If a fault occurs after the analog converter replaced, It is required to replace the
control stack (RKJS1SXK-2154□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)
[Contents]When inverter output frequency is setting No. 176[367] or lower and output current detection value (Motor converted value) of setting No. 177[368] or more has continued for the time of setting No. 178[369] or longer, start delay is detected.
Note)Set No. in [ ] is a set number when "Motor 2" is selected.
[Causes]① Cannot be started due to lack of motor capacity② Cannot be started because the motor is mechanically locked.③ Restart-up control in free-run does not actuate normally.
[Check and remedy]① Increase motor capacity.② Check whether the motor is mechanically locked.③ Check whether restart-up from free-run can be performed normally. We would like you to contact our company because we will suppose that it is required to
adjust the restart-up control again, when additional faults have occurred.
7 S ●PDU Pulse distribution error
[Contents]This fault code is output if the WDT (watch dog timer) operated due to abnormal CPU for the pulse distribution which controls the output pulse or abnormal peripheral circuits.
[Causes] Abnormal CPU for pulse distribution or abnormal peripheral circuits.
[Check and remedy]① Abnormal CPU for pulse distribution or abnormal peripheral circuits.
It is required to replace the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) or the control stack (RKJS1SXY-□□□□□.)
7-12
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
By setting No.284, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and minor fault 2 can be selected ( see page of 4-52 .)
[Contents]If DDC control power supply has suffered from momentary power interruption (below 85% of power supplyvoltage for at least 20 ms) while the motor is operating , the fault is indicated.
If the minor fault 2 or only momentary power interruption in selection of pulse off has occurred, no fault trip will occur.
After power recovery (provided that operation conditions/commands from MICREX and outside are valid), the operation will restart automatically.
When operation continuation (setting No.284 ≧ 2) is selected , and・ when no detection is selected by selection of the line voltage detection (setting No.293=0), operation is
ddecelerated at the decelerating rate defined by setting No.287 and accelerate again to the frequency after power recovery, where momentary interruption occurred,
・ when detection is selected by selection of the line voltage detection (setting No.293=1), normal operation is carried out during momentary interruption[Check and remedy]
① check whether momentary power interruption has occurred actually. If no occurrence of actual momentary power interruption,② check whether the control power supply voltage is within ± 10% of rated voltage.③ check whether the input tap of the control power supply transformer (AC 220 V or AC 200 V taps)
is selected correctly. ④ check whether CN11-5 or 6 of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) is correctly
connected to the control power supply transformer.If no correspondence to the check items in ① - ④, it is required to replace the control stack
(RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)
Fault codes (4/21)
11 ○ Selection by setting No.284H ●MPWRL Line instantaneous power
interruption
10 ○ Selection by setting No.284H ●PWRL Instantaneous power
interruption
By setting No.284, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and minor fault 2 can be selected ( see page of 4-52 .)
[Contents] If line power supply has suffered from momentary power interruption (that is below the setting value of No.295 and continuing for more than 4 ms) while the motor is operating, a fault is indicated.
However, when a Minor fault 2 or momentary power interruption occurs in case selecting Pulse OFF, a fault trip does not occur. The operation will restart automatically after power recovery, provided that the operation condition and command from MICREX or outside are valid. Operation is decelerated at the decelerating rate defined by setting No.287 during momentary power
interruption when operation continuation is selected. And after power recovery, peration is acceleratedagain to the frequency where momentary interruption occurred. This failure is not detected when line voltage detection (setting No.293=0) is no selected.
[Check and remedy]① Check whether the momentary power interruption of the line power supply actually occurred
If no actual occurrence of the momentary power interruption,② Check whether the line voltage is within ± 10% of the rated voltage.③ Check whether terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) are connected with wires.④ Check connections between terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) and terminals of the control PCB
(CN11-1, 2 and 3.) ⑤ Check whether the actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection] is within the range of +2% to -1%
which is computed by the next formula.Line voltage
× 100% = Actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection].line rated voltage
If the actual value is out of allowance, adjust it using setting No.294, so that it meet the value computed by the above formula.
If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ⑤, and the adjustment of ⑤ can not be carried out, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)
7-13
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (5/21)
12
13
H
H
●
●
MLPWR
LPWRL
Line power fault
Power fault
[Contents] If line power supply suffered from momentary power interruption (that is below the setting value of
No.295 ) and continues for more than the time defined by setting No.290) while the motor is operating, a
fault is detected. This fault is not detected when major fault by line power momentary interruption
(setting No.284=0) is selected.
Also this failure is not detected when line voltage detection (setting No.293=0) is no selected.
[Check and remedy]
① check whether momentary line power interruption has occurred actually.
If no occurrence of actual momentary power interruption,
② check whether the line power supply voltage is within ± 10% of rated voltage.
③ Check whether terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) are connected with wires.
④ Check connections between terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) and terminals of the control PCB
(CN11-1,2 and 3.)
⑤ Check whether the actual value data No.475 [ line voltage detection] is within the range of +2% to -1%
which is computed by the next formula.Line voltage
× 100% = Actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection].line rated voltage
If the actual value is out of allowance, adjust it, using setting No.294, so that it met the value computed by
the above formula.
If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ⑤, and the adjustment of ⑤ can not be carried out, it is
required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see
page of 2-2.)
[Contents] If DDC control power supply suffered from momentary power interruption (85% or lower of power
supply voltage,) and momentary power interruption continues for more than the time defined by the
setting value of No.290 where no line voltage detection (setting No.284=0) and by the setting value
of No.297 where line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=1), while the motor is operating, a
failure is detected.
However, this failure is not detected when line voltage detection (setting No. 284=0) is no selected.
[Check and remedy]
① check whether the control power interruption has occurred actually.
If no occurrence of actual momentary power interruption,
② check whether the control power supply voltage is within ± 10% of rated voltage.
③ check whether the input tap of the control power supply transformer (AC 220 V or AC 200 V taps)
is selected correctly.
④ check whether CN11-5 or 6 of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) is correctly
connected to the control power supply transformer.
If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ④, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-
□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)
7-14
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (6/21)
17
18
19 ●
●
○ Selection by setting No.173
H
S
S
●MCLAP
SYNC
RTRY
Circuit breaker switching fault
Synchronous fault
Pick-up opeartion unsuccessful
By the digit of setting No.173-10, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and Minor fault 2 can be selected (see page of 4-41).
[Contents] If both inverter circuit breaker and bypass circuit breaker are connected for more than 1 second while operation of synchronous switchover from/to bypass is performed, a failure is detected.
[Check and remedy]① Check whether the answerback signal wirings of the inverter and bypass circuit breaker are connected
correctly to terminals as drawn in elementary wiring diagram. ② Check whether the setting values by setting No.256 to 264 and 271 to 273 correspond to the
descriptions in the elementary wiring diagram.③ Check whether while operation of synchronous switchover to bypass is performed, the inverter circuit
breaker is opened after the bypass circuit breaker is switched on, or when operation of synchronous switchover from bypass is performed, the bypass circuit breaker is opened after the inverter circuit breaker is switched on. Moreover, check whether relays in the sequence actuate correcly.
④ Check whether conditions are correctly so indicated that the corresponded bit is on(■)in No.382 for the inverter circuit breaker switched ON and the corresponded bit is on(■)in No.382 for the bypass circuit breaker switched ON.
If it does not correspond to the check items of ① to ④, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)
[Contents]For synchronous switchover operation, meeting with the phase of the commercial power can not be completed within 20 s after synchronization is commanded, a failure is detected.
[Check and remedy]① Check whether the actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection] is within the range of 2% to -1%
which is computed by the next formula.
× 100% = Actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection].
If the actual value is out of allowance, adjust it using setting No.294 so that it meet the value computed by
the above formula.If the synchronous delay fault has occurred when operation of synchronous switchover to/from bypass wascarried out after checking the items in ①. We will assume that adjustment of the regulator is incorrect, wewould like you to contact us after checking the setting No.301 to 305.
[Contents] If the number of retrials is more than the value of setting No.196 when the inverterstarts, a fault is detected. However, only when setting No.195 is "0" a fault is detected.
[Causes]① current detector is abnormal.② adjustment value is abnormal.
[Check and remedy]① check whether all setting values are input corresponding to the same setting values in the test
report.② check whether the motor can be started from a motor stop condition.
If it can not be started, it is assumed that current detection is abnormal.Check whether connecting wirings of the current detector are connected correctly.
In case of no correspondence to ① and ②, it is supposed to be required to adjust the speedsearch function again. Please contact us.
7-15
Line voltage
line rated voltage
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (7/21)
22
23
24
25
●
●
○ Selection by setting No.173
R
R
R
R
●
●
FTB
FTA
FTC
OVG
External Minor fault
External Major fault
External moderate fault
Ground fault
[Contents]This is output when Minor fault is input from the external sequence (terminals described in the elementary wiring diagram).[Remedy]Eliminate the cause of the external minor fault.
[Contents]This is output when Major fault is input from the external sequence (terminals described in the elementary wiring diagram).[Remedy]Eliminate the cause of the external minor fault.
[Contents]This is output when Moderate fault is input from the external sequence (terminals described in the elementary wiring diagram).[Remedy]Eliminate the cause of the external minor fault.
By the digit of setting No.173-1, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and minor fault 1 can be selected
(see page of 4-41).
[Contents] The ground fault detection relay operated to detect a fault.
[Causes]
① Ground fault of inverter output cable
② Ground fault of motor
[Check and remedy]
① Ground the inverter after check of discharge, and check Earth fault of the cables and the
motors after disconnecting the output cables from terminals of the inverter
② If this fault has occurred during Pulse of the inverter, we will suppose that the earth
fault detector is error. Replace it with a spare part and check after restarting.
In case of no correspondence to ① and ②, it is supposed to be required to adjust the speed
search function again. Please contact us.
7-16
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
[Contents] A fault is detected when fan fault of the inverter panel and transformer overheat (Major fault).
[Check and remedy] (1) Cooling fan fault of the inverter panel
① Check the actuation of the thermal device for the inverter cooling fan.② Check that the thermal device of inverter panel cooling fan is set corresponding to the
thermal setting value described in the sequence.In case of ① and ②, it is required to replace the cooling fan.When setting value of ② is different from the value described in the sequence, change thesetting of the thermal device and reset it's value, and then restart the cooling fan.
(2) Overheating of the inverter input transformer (Major fault); it is deemed the cooling fan fault as Major fault depending upon panel constitution. Therefore, because the overheating of the inverter input transformer may not be monitored, check the sequence. Moreover, a cooling fan heavy failure and
a transformer overheating heavy failure might be individually observed. ① Check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less,
and if not, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.② Check input current of the input transformer of the inverter. If input current exceeds the
rated current, it is required to review the operating frequency or the input transformer capacity.
26
27 ●
R
R
●FANH
FANL
Fan/temperature system Major fault
Fan/Temperature system Minor fault
Fault codes (8/21)
[Contents] A fault is detected when fan fault of the inverter panel and transformer overheat (Minor fault).
[Check and remedy] (1) The cooling fan fault of the transformer panel
① Check the actuation of the thermal device for the transformer cooling fan.② Check that the thermal device of transformer panel cooling fan is set corresponding to the
thermal setting value described in the sequence.In case of ① and ②, it is required to replace the cooling fan.When setting value of ② is different to the value described in the sequence, change thesetting of the thermal device and reset it’s value, and then restart the cooling fan.
(2) Overheating of the inverter input transformer (Minor fault); it is deemed the cooling fan as Major faultdepending upon panel constitution. Therefore, because the overheating of theinverter input transformer may not BE monitored, check the sequence.
① check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less, and ifnot, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.
② check input current of the input transformer of the inverter. If input current exceeds therated current, it is required to review the operating frequency or the input transformer capacity.
7-17
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E7-18
Fault codes (9/21)
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
28 H ●OTDDC Printed Board Temperature abnormal
[Contents] A fault is detected when the temperature of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□) exceeds60 degree C.
[Check and remedy](1) The ambient temperature of the controller rises.
① check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less, andif not, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.
If it does not correspond to the check items ①, it is required to replace the controlstack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2).
[Contents] A fault is detected when fan fault of the transformer overheat (Major fault).
[Check and remedy] Overheating of the inverter input transformer (Major fault); A cooling fan heavy failure and a transformer overheating heavy failure might be individually observed according to the board composition. Only in this case, this failure does the breakdown detection. Therefore, check the sequence.① Check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less,
and if not, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.② Check input current of the input transformer of the inverter. If input current exceeds the
rated current, it is required to review the operating frequency or the input transformer capacity.
29 R ●TRTMP Transformer overheat Major fault
- - INR-HJ5235-E
31 S ●LINK Optical link error
[Contents] This is detected when an optical link constituting a multiplex transmission is abnormal.
[Causes]
① The optical link suffered from poor contact or the light quantity decreased.② The main controller is abnormal.③ The local controller is abnormal.
[Check and Remedy]
① Make the inverter receive the power supply again, and check whether transmission is established again. When after making the inverter receive power again, transmission can not be established and optical link error has occurred again,
② Check whether the short circuit connector is surely mounted on CNT terminal of the inverter cell. Moreover, check whether the fuse for the control power supply equipped on the front surface of the
inverter cell is blown. ③ check whether the optical cables (RM1, TM1) on the front surface (see page of 2-15) of cell
internal local controller and the optical cable (CN26, CN27) of control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) in the control stack are connected correctly.
When those are connected correctly, check whether the optical cables are breaking or bending on the way.④ In the condition of no momentary power interruption, when it is detected concurrently with a fault
No.*8 cell control power supply lowering (4 to 18 is entered in * corresponding to each cell,) it is supposed that the inverter cell internal power supply or the controller failed. Replace the inverter cell.
If it does not correspond to the check items ① to ④. It is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)
Fault codes (10/21)
7-19
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
32 MOD ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SMOD error
By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42 .)
[Contents]When a logical error (address error and parity error, etc.) occursor the transmission at the time of set No.377 becomes interrupted by Modbus, the breakdown operation is done.(it is detected only when operating concurrently with Modbus and MC-RN condition is ON.)
[Causes]① Interruption, reset and abnormality of power supply of PLC(occurrence in all inverters connected)
② RS-485 cables breaking, contact failure③ Contact failure of RS-485 connectors, end resistance failure④ MOD card abnormality⑤ Interruption of transmission due to much noise
[Remedy]Check Modbus receiving counter is progressing. Moreover, after recording a faulton front surface of PLC and the light-on and -off conditions of state indication LED,
① When PLC: reset or replace power supply of PLC .② Cable breaking and contact failure: check wiring or connecting conditions of RS-485.③ Contact failure of connectors: check connecting condition of RS-485 connector
or end resistance④ Replace MOD card.⑤ check wirings of the transmission cable or grounding.
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (11/21)
7-20
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
34 PROFI
By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42 .)
[Contents]When transmission is interrupted on PROFIBUS for 100ms or more, this fault actuates.(it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX and MC-RN condition is ON.)
[Causes]① Interruption, reset and abnormality of power supply of MICREX (PLC)(occurrence in all inverters connected)
② PROFIBUS cables breaking, contact failure③ Contact failure of PROFIBUS connectors, end resistance failure④ PSB card abnormality⑤ Interruption of transmission due to much noise
[Remedy]Check whether No. 710 transmission reception counter orNo. 711 transmission sending counter is progressing. Moreover, after recording a faulton front surface of PLC and the light-on and -off conditions of state indication LED,
① When MICREX (PLC): reset or replace power supply of PLC .② Cable breaking and contact failure: check wiring or connecting conditions of PROFIBUS.③ Contact failure of connectors: check connecting condition of PROFIBUS connector
or end resistance④ Replace PSB card.⑤ check wirings of the transmission cable or grounding.
● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPROFIBUS error
33 PSB
By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42).
[Contents] This actuates when "PSB abnormality" is set in status flag of PSB (PROFIBUStransmission board). (it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX andMC-RN condition turn-ON).
[Causes] Hardware failure of PSB board.
[Remedy]Replacement of PSB boardNo abnormality of the inverter
● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPSB error
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (12/21)
7-21
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42).
[Contents] This actuates when "DLA abnormality" is set in status flag of DLA (D-LINEtransmission board). (it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX andMC-RN condition turn-ON).
DLA: this is the board inserted in ACS2000, ICS, etc. for D-LINE transmission (sending side).
[Causes] Hardware failure of DLA board.
[Remedy]Replacement of DLA boardNo abnormality of the inverter
37 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SDLA DLA error
By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42).
[Contents] This actuates when P(E) link healthy bit sent from MPU of IFC (Transmissiontransponder) to DLA of IFC is "0". (it is detected only when operating concurrentlywith MICREX and MC-RN condition is ON.)
[Causes] P (E) link Error: when MICREX is disconnected on P(E) and major fault occurred.
[Remedy] Recovery of P(E) link.No abnormality of the inverter.
By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42).
[Contents] This actuates when "TER:transmission abnormal" bit is 1 in received data fromMICREX (PLC). (it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX and MC-RNcondition is ON)
[Remedy] Check the reason why "TER bit" is activated in MICREX (PLC) side.No abnormality of the inverter.
35 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174MICRX MICREX error
36 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SIFC Upper transmission
system error
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (13/21)
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42 .)
[Contents]When transmission is interrupted on D-LINE and T-LINK for 100ms or more, this fault actuates. (it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX and MC-RN condition is ON.)
[Causes]① Interruption, reset and abnormality of power supply of MICREX (PLC) (occurrence in allinverters connected)
② D-LINE(T-LINK) cables breaking, contact failure③ Contact failure of D-LINE connectors, end resistance failure④ DSM card abnormality⑤ Change of definitions of D-LINE or T-LINK in MICREX (PLC)⑥ Interruption of transmission due to much noise
[Remedy] Check whether a indication value (which is normal at 80) in No. 780 in controller , andindication value in No.781 (D-LINE is normal at 87, T-LINK at 83), and check whetherNo. 782 transmission reception counter is progressing. Moreover, after recording a faulton front surface of PLC and the light-on and -off conditions of state indication LED,
① When MICREX (PLC): reset or replace power supply of PLC .② Cable breaking and contact failure: check wiring or connecting conditions of D-LINE or T-LINK.③ Contact failure of connectors: check connecting condition of D-LINE or T-LINK connector
or end resistanceEnd resistance: connect to both ends (connectors) of the transmission cable (100 Ω)
④ Replace DSM card.⑤ If impossible to reset the fault , review definitions of D-LINE and T-LINK and the inverter
setting.⑥ check wirings of the transmission cable or grounding.
38 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SDLINE D-LINE(T-LINK) error
7-22
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (14/21)
The following fault codes concern details of faults which occurred in the inverter cell. Codes 40 to 207 below have the same fault contents in each cell.
Fault code Inverter cell where fault occurred
40 to 49
50 to 59
60 to 69
70 to 79
80 to 89
90 to 99
Inverter U1 cell
Inverter U2 cell
Inverter V1 cell
Inverter V2 cell
Inverter W1 cell
Inverter W2 cell
100 to 109
110 to 119
120 to 129
130 to 139
140 to 149
150 to 159
Inverter U3 cell
Spare
Inverter V3 cell
Inverter W3 cell
7-23
160 to 169
170 to 179
Inverter U1, U2, U3 cells Local optical link fault
Spare
DANGER
180 to 189
193 to 195
Inverter V1, V2, V3 cells Local optical link fault
Spare
Inverter W1, W2, W3 cells Local optical link fault
Spare
196 to 197
198 to 200
201 to 202
203 to 205
206 to 207
Spare
Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (15/21)
[Contents] This is output when the DC main circuit fuse of the inverter inside cells has blown out.Check the actuation indication inside the unit for each discrimination.
[Cause] When the fuse inside the inverter, short circuit of the inverter output or IGBT short circuitdue to abnormality of the controller or the gate drive unit.
[Remedy]
In most of cases, IGBTs are broken out (even such fuses which actuate in high speed can notcooperate with the IGBT to protect fully. Such fuses are mounted to prevent the expansion of damages.Accordingly, it is recommendable to replace the relevant inverter or contact us.
*0 H ●DCF Cell DC fuse blow
7-24
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
[Contents] Output it when IGBT of the inverter in the cell is short-circuited.Check the actuation indication inside the unit for each discrimination.The function of IGBT short-circuited detection is an option.
[Cause] Short-circuit of inverter output, short-circuit by semiconductor element damage of IGBT etc. , and IGBT short-circuit due to abnormality of controller and gate drive unit.
[Remedy]
There is a possibility that the IGBT element has been damaged.(When the IGBT element short-circuit is detected, the software of the IGBT element is intercepted to prevent damage from expanding.)Accordingly, it is recommendable to replace the relevant inverter or contact us.
*1 H ●IGBTS Cell IGBT short-circuit
DANGER
- - INR-HJ5235-E
*2 ●SOV Cell main circuit overvoltage
Fault codes (16/21)
[Contents] This is output when DC main circuit voltage of each inverter cell become excessive (DC1050V or more).
[Causes]・ Line voltage rising・ Regeneration action etc.・ Malfunction of detectors
[Check and remedy]① This inverter is not mounted with a regeneration function. Check the mode if regeneration
operation.If operated in regeneration mode, adjust acceleration or deceleration time in setting No.29to 34 and 45 to 54 to make the inverter deceleration time long (See pages of 4-22 to 25 fordetails.)
② Check whether line voltage exceeds + 10% of rated voltage.If exceeding, change the main transformer tap.
③ Check the initial charge voltage of the cell circuit whether it is within ± 3% of the valuecomputed by the below formula, and check the actual value ;when 6.6kV output specificaion, No. 453 to 455, 458, and 460 to 466.
Line voltage× 1810 V = cell main circuit initial charge voltage
input transformer tap voltage
When exceeding ±3 %, the failure of the controller may occur. It is required to replace therelevant inverter cell.
If does not corresponds to the check items of ① to ③, after breakage of control power supplyreplace the relevant inverter cell. Perform checking work again.
*3 ●SCell in-decelation main circuit overvoltageOVDEC
[Contents] If in deceleration operation of the inverter, DC main circuit voltage has beenexcessive (DC 1050 V or more).
[Causes] DC voltage rising due to the motor regeneration mode.
[Check and remedy]① Adjust the acceleration and deceleration time by setting No.29 – 34 and 45 – 54 to make the
inverter deceleration time long.( See pages of 4-22 -25 for details)
② Check whether line voltage exceeds +10% of the rated voltage.If exceeding, change the main circuit transformer tap.
7-25
DANGER
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
*4
*5
S
S
●
●
Cell main circuit undervoltage P-M
Cell main circuit undervoltage M-N
UV PM
UV MN
Fault codes (17/21)
[Contents] This is output when :① While the inverter is operated, DC main circuit voltage is too low (approximately 80%
compared to the receiving voltage), or② even when initial charging is performed, DC main circuit voltage does not exceed
detection level.
[Causes] ① The line voltage drops .② AC input fuse is blown,③ In initial charging side, actuating failure and wiring breakage may occur in AC
receiving power circuit (Rectifier diode initial charging resistance, DC thyristorinside cell and driving circuit).
[Check and remedy]
① Check whether meltdown indication indication target of AC fuse is indicated.If the fuse is blown, it is required to replace the inverter cell.
② Check whether the main transformer tap is selected correctly .③ Check whether the line voltage is within ±10% of the rated voltage.④ Check whether setting No.158 [Cell rated voltage selection] is set like as below.
Setting No.158 : 5, 7 (input rated voltage :6600 V): 0, 2 (input rated voltage :6000 V)
If the setting value is different, set it correctly.After setting, switch on the control power supply and the main circuit power supply again,and then check again.
⑤ Check whether the initial charging voltage of the cell main circuit is within ± 3% of thevalue computed by below formula, and check actual value data,when 6.6kV output specificaion, No. 453 to 455, 458, and 460 to 466.
Line voltage× 1810V = Cell main circuit initial charging voltage
Input transformer tap voltage
When it does not correspond, thyristor can be abnormal. Replace the local controller insidethe relevant cell and inverter cell, and perform checking work again.
7-26
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
*7 S ●Cell PWM optical link errorPWM
Fault codes (18/21)
[Contents] This is detected when the failure of optical link for PWM signal has occurred.
[Causes] ① Contact failure of the optical link, or light volume lowering② A local controller is abnormal.③ Main controller is abnormal.
[Check and remedy]
① Check whether the optical cable (RM2) of the front face of the local controller inside cell (see page of 2-15) and the optical cable (TM1 to TM21) of the optical converter unit PCB (CDJC1EOK-□□□□□, see pages of 2-11 to 14) are connected as the correct combination.
If those are connected correctly, check whether optical cables are broken or bended on the way.② When the fault no.*8 cell control power supply lowering is detected concurrently while no occurrence
of the instantaneous power interruption, a failure of the power supply inside the inverter cell or a failure of the local controller may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell.
If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ②, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the optical converter unit PCB (CDJC1EOK-□□□□□, see pages of 2-11to 14).
*6 S ●Cell main circuit voltage unbalanceUNB
[Contents] This is output when the deviation between DC voltage P and N sides in the cell continues toexceed 14 % or more of the rated voltage for 5 seconds.
[Causes]① AC input fuse is blown.② Breakage of the diode component③ The local controller is abnormal.
[Check and remedy]
① Check whether meltdown indication indication target of AC fuse is indicated.If the fuse is blown, it is required to replace the inverter cell.
② Check whether the initial charging voltage of the cell main circuit is within ± 3% of the valuecomputed by below formula and check the actual value data,when 6.6kV output specificaion, No. 453 to 455, 458, and 460 to 466.
Line voltage× 1810V = Cell main circuit initial charging voltage
Input transformer tap voltage
When it does not correspond, the local controller inside the relevant cell or the diode or thyristormay be abnormal. Replace the local controller inside the relevant cell, and perform checkingwork again.
7-27
DANGER
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (19/21)
*9 S ●Cell cooling frame overheatingOTF
*8 ○ Selection by setting No.284
H ●Cell control power supply loweringPWRL
[Contents] This is detected when the control power supply voltage inside cell has dropped or aabnormality of the control power supply inside cell has occurred.
[Causes]① The control power supply voltage inside a cell dropps.② The control power supply inside a cell is abnormal.
[Check and remedy]
① Check whether instantaneous power interruption of the line power supply has occurred actually.If no occurrence,② check whether the fuse for the control power supply on front face of the inverter cell has
blown.If it is blown out, it is supposed that the controller inside the inverter cell or the local
controller is abnormal. Replace the relevant inverter cell.
If it does not correspond and the cell instantaneous power interruption continues, an abnormality of local controller or interface unit may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell and perform checking work again.
[Contents] This is detected when temperature of the cooling fin in cell exceeds 90 degree C or more.
[Causes] ① The ambient temperature rising② The air filter of the inverter panel clogging
[Check and remedy]① Check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel has been over 40 degree C.
If its temperature has been over 40 degree C, operate the sir conditioner to lower theambient temperature below 40 degree C.
② Check whether the air filter of the inverter panel is clogging.If the air filter is clogging, clean the air filter.
If it does not correspond and the cell instantaneous power interruption continues, an abnormality of local controller or interface unit may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell and perform checking work again.
7-28
DANGER
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (20/21)
[Contents] This is detected when an optical constructing multiplex transmission is abnormal.
[Causes] ① contact failure and light volume lowering② A local controller is abnormal③ The main controller is abnormal.
[Check and remedy]
① Make the inverter receive the power again, and check whether transmission is established again.If after making the inverter receive the power again, transmission was not established and theoptical link failure has occurred again.
② Check whether the shortcut connector is mounted perfectly on CNT terminal of the inverter cell.Moreover, check whether a fuse for the control power supply in the inverter cell front face hasbeen blown.
③ Check whether the optical cables (RM1, TM1) of the front face of the local controller inside cell(see page of 2-15) and the optical cables (CN26, CN27) of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□,see page of 2-2) are connected correctly.If those are connected correctly, check whether an optical cable is broken or bended on the way.
④ When the fault No.*8 cell control power supply lowering is detected concurrently while no occurrenceof the instantaneous power interruption, a failure of the power supply inside the inverter cell or afailure of the controller may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell. (the mark "*" is filledwith 4 to 18 corresponded)
If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ④, it is required to replace the control stack(RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2).
7-29
DANGER
Major fault 2
Middlefault
Minor fault 1
Minor fault 2 Remarks
Fault code
Major fault 1
Touch panel code Fault Name
193 S ●LLINKU1 cell Local optical link error
194 S ●LLINK U2 cell Local optical link error
195 S ●LLINK
V1 cell Local optical link error
196
V2 cell Local optical link error
197
W1 cell Local optical link error
198 S ●LLINK
W2 cell Local optical link error
199 S ●LLINK
U3 cell Local optical link error
200 S ●LLINK
201
V3 cell Local optical link error
202
203 S ●LLINK
W3 cell Local optical link error
204 S ●LLINK
205 S ●LLINK
206
207
Spare Spare
Spare Spare
Spare Spare
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Fault codes (21/21)
7-30
Note) The presumption simplification of the locating fault is aimed at in the following failures since CDJS1FLX-5275A/A the soft model written in local controller (CDJC1FCU-5150□) in the inverter cell. (example)It is presumed that abnormality occurs on the optical transmission road between the V1 cell and the V2 cell when the failure is registered to failure No.199(V2 cell local optical link malfunction)-205(W3 cell local optical link malfunction). Please confirm the V1 cell and the V2 cell first when you do the above-mentioned confirmation treatment. The optical cable connection between inverter cells is connected in the following order. - For 6.6kV inverter deviceControl stack →U1 cell →U2 cell →U3 Cell →V1 cell →V2 cell →→V3 cell →W1 cell →W2 cell →W3 cell → control stack
- - INR-HJ5235-E
7–4 Loader Trace-back Data List
The following trace backing data can be gathered with the loader (option). "High-speed trace" that gathers data at 1ms sampling interval after 24ms before 200ms of failure generation point "Low-speed trace" that gathers data at 200ms sampling interval after 4.8s before 40s of failure generation pointTwo kinds of data can be gathered.
Data No. Data name
Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) input1
Line voltage detected
2
3
Frequency command
4
Frequency actual value
5
Voltage command (after compensation)
6
Magnetic flux filter output
7
Voltage command (AVR input)
8
Output voltage estimation filter output
9
AVR output
10
Active current Iq command
11
Reactive current Id command
12
Active current Iq detected
13
Reactive current Id detected
14
Output current detected (Motor conversion)
15
16
17
U1 cell main circuit voltage detected
18
U2 cell main circuit voltage detected
19
V1 cell main circuit voltage detected
Loader trace-back data list (1/2) [Analog data]
20
V2 cell main circuit voltage detected21
W1 cell main circuit voltage detected
22
W2 cell main circuit voltage detected
23
U3 cell main circuit voltage detected
24
U4 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]
25
V3 cell main circuit voltage detected
26
V4 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]
27 W3 cell main circuit voltage detected
W4 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]28
Cell cooling fins temperature detected (Max. value)
Main controller temperature detected
7-31
30
31
29
U5 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]
V5 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]
W5 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Data No Data name
39
Frequency matching (PS)
40
Slip in-limitation
41
AVR in-saturation
42
Current in-limitation
43
Minor fault
44
Emergency stop processing in progress
Transmission error (TER)
Electrical condition ready (ERD)
Circuit breaker answer (RNMC)
32
Brake release (SS)
33
Operation in progress
34
Pulse ON (PON)
35
Operation command 1 (SY1)
36
Di operation command (RUN)
37
Instantaneous power interruption processing in progress (PDOWN)
38
Search end
Loader trace-back data list (2/2) [Digital data]
47
48
49
50
51
52
45
46
Synchronous switching processing in progress
Phases matching
Synchronous completed
Inverter breaker answer
Line instantaneous power stop interrupted
Switching from inverter to bypass operation command
Switching from bypass to inverter operation command53
Bypass circuit breaker answer
54
55
7-32
57
58
59
60
61
62
56
63
64
ON
~OFF2
~OFF3
INV_EN
RFG_EN
F_ECO
RFG_ST
SET_EN
PLC_EN
JOG+
JOG-
ACKN
PROFIBUSrelation
65
67
66
- - INR-HJ5235-E7-33
1. Inverter input beaker can not be switched ON.
(1) Check if electrical conditions are completed (Indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: ■ is indicated
because ERD of start-up conditions are uncompleted).
If electrical conditions are uncompleted and ERD of Relay unit is not ON, check following items.
① Check if Major fault 1 (by occurrence of major fault, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: FTH1
for start-up conditions is indicated in ■) or Major fault 2 (by occurrence of Major fault 2,
indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: FTH2 for start-up condition is indicated in ■) has
occurred.
If Major fault 1 or Major fault 2 has occurred, with referring to items "Fault diagnosis" in
Chapter 7, eliminate fault causes.
② Check if Minor fault 1 ( by occurrence of minor fault1, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:
FTL1 for start-up conditions is indicated in ■) has occurred.
If Minor fault 1 has occurred, with referring to items "Fault diagnosis" in Chapter 7, eliminate
fault causes.
③ Check if external electrical conditions DI [RD] are input (by non-input, indication No.380 or
Touch Panel M07: RD for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If no input, with referring to elementary wiring diagram, establish the external conditions connected
to terminals of No. TB1-12 and 13 or No. TB3-6 of Relay unit (see page of 2-27).
④ Check if all setting data are set ( because there is any non-setting, indication No.380 or Touch
Panel M07: UNSET for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If there is any non-setting datum, data setting No. which are not yet set are indicated by indication
No.999. Input setting data which are recorded in the testing report.
⑤ Check if instantaneous power interruption is detected ( by detection, indication No.380 or Touch
Panel M07: PWRL for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If instantaneous power interruption has been detected, with referring the fault code details [see
page 7-13] of instantaneous power interruption [Fault code No.10], recover it.
⑥ Check if line instantaneous power interruption has been detected ( by detection, indication No.380
or Touch Panel M07: MPWRL for stat-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If line instantaneous power interruption has been detected, with referring the fault code details [see
page 7-13] of line instantaneous power interruption [Fault code No.11], recover it.
Trouble shooting (1/4)
7–5 Trouble shooting
- - INR-HJ5235-E7-34
(2) Referring to elementary wiring diagram, check if any conditions other than electrical
conditions are established.
⑦ Check if DI error is input, or not (By input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: DIERR
for start-up conditions is is indicated in ■).
If Di error has been input, eliminate DI error.
・ If DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where external Major fault [DI function selection
setting No.4] is assigned, is input (by input, DI corresponding to indication No.382 is
indicated in ■), eliminate the fault cause connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit
(see page of 2-27).
・ If DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where external Minor fault [DI function selection
setting No.5] is assigned, is input (by input, DI corresponding to indication No.382 is
indicated in ■), eliminate the fault cause connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit
(see page of 2-27).
・ If a fan temperature system Major fault is input (by input, FANH in indication No.381
is indicated in ■), with referring details of fault codes (page 7-17) of Fan temperature system
/ Major fault [Fault code No.26], eliminate the fault cause.
・ If a fan temperature system Minor fault is input (by input, FANL in indication No.381
is indicated in ■), with referring details of fault codes (page 7-17) of Fan temperature system
/ Minor fault [Fault code No.27], eliminate the fault cause.
・ Check AC input fuse target in the front face of the inverter cell.
If the target is indicated, AC input fuse has been blown. It is required to replace the inverter
cell.
If it is more than above descriptions, it is supposed that Di fault inside the inverter cell (by a fault
has been detected, the relevant cell in indication No.387 is indicated in ■).
Please contact us.
Trouble shooting (2/4)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
2.Operation can not be carried out.
(1) Check if input breaker answer-back signal is input ( by no input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel
M07: MCRN for start-up conditions is indicated in ■). If no input, with referring page 7-33, check
if electrical conditions are established completely.
If electrical conditions have been established, with referring the elementary wiring ,check if any
condition other than electrical conditions for the circuit breaker switching-on condition .
(2) If a condition of line voltage detection is valid (setting No.293 = 1), check if line instantaneous
power interruption ha been detected (by detection of instantaneous power interruption, indication
No.380 or Touch Panel M07: MPWRL for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If instantaneous power interruption has been detected, with referring details (page of 7-13) of fault
codes for instantaneous power interruption [Fault code No.11], recover the instantaneous power
interruption.
(3) Check if DI pulse off conditions are input (by input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:
POFF for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If it is input, check if [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where pulse off [DI function selection No.8] is
allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■), and eliminate
pulse off command connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit (see page 2-27).
(4) Check if emergency stop SYX is input (by input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:
ETC. for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If it is input, check DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where emergency stop [DI function selection No.1]
is allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■), and eliminate
pulse off command connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit (see page 2-27).
(5) If condition of switchover between line and the inverter is valid (setting No.300 = 1), check if the
inverter breaker was switched on when start-up of variable speed operation by the inverter (by
non-input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: MCINV for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).
If it is not input, check if DI[X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where the inverter breaker answer-back [DI
function selection No.29] is allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI for indication No. is
indicated in ■),
and check if the breaker answer-back signal connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit
(see page of 2-27) is input.
Check if the bypass breaker is switched on when switching from line to the inverter is carried out,
and check if DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14] ,where the bypass beaker answer-back [DI function
selection No.30] is allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated
in ■).
If it is not input, check if the breaker answer-back signal connected to the relevant terminal of
Relay unit (see page of 2-27) is input.
(6) Check if frequency command is input.
① When operation by analog frequency command,
・ check if analog frequency operation mode is set (setting No.165 = xx1x).
・ check if DI analog frequency setting mode is selected, and check that DI [X1 to X9, X11 to
X14], where DI/AI speed command switching [DI function selection No.11] is allocated, is input
(by input the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■).
・ check if DI operation command is input (by input, RUN in indication No.381 is indicated in ■).
・ check if analog frequency command is input ( indication No.469 is other than "0").
Trouble shooting (3/4)
7-35
- - INR-HJ5235-E7-36
② When Di frequency command operation,
・ check if DI frequency command operation mode is set (setting No.160 = x1xx).
・ check if DI analog frequency setting mode is not selected and DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14],
where DI/AI speed command switching [DI function selection No.11] are allocated,
not input (by non-input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in □).
・ check if DI operation command is input (by input, RUN for indication No.381 is
indicated in ■).
・ check if DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where forward revolution command [DI function
selection No.2] and reverse revolution command [DI function selection No.3] are allocated,
is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■).
③ when transmission operation,
・ check if transmission operation mode is set (setting No.160 = xxx0).
・ check if transmission is normal (by normality, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:
TER for start-up conditions is indicated in □).
・ check if transmission operation command "SY1" is input (by input, SY1 for indication
No.748 is indicated in ■).
・ check if transmission frequency command is input (indication No.720 is other than "0").
④ When Touch Panel operation:
・ check if Touch Panel operation mode is set (setting No.160 = xxx1).
・ check if it is set that Touch Panel operation can not perform (by setting No.161 = xx1x,
impossible to operate).
・ With referring to section 3-6-2 "Operation from Touch Panel" (page of 3-12),
perform operation.
(7) check SW 6 on the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2).
When SW 6 is short-circuited with No. 1-2 pin (by input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:
ETC. for start-up conditions is indicated in ■), the control PCB is set in testing mode setting for
our company. Therefore, after switching off the control power supply, release the No.1-2 pin of
SW 6 (or short-circuit No. 2-3 pin). And then switch on the control power supply.
Trouble shooting (4/4)
- - INR-HJ5235-E
Chapter 8 Preventive Maintenance
8-1 Preventive Maintenance
The inverter incorporates many devices. Some of them have limited life. This chapter shows recommended period of replacing their parts as preventive maintenance.
Classif-ication
Part nameReplace period
(years) Location Remarks
Resisto
rs
Ceramic resistor, wirewound resistor
7.5 to 10Inverter cell unit Ground fault detection circuit, etc.
The interval is considerably affected by environmental conditions. If winding or ceramic has been disfigured by heat, replacement without delay is necessary.
Capacito
rs
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor
5 to 7
Power supply unit Interface unitCell controller Inverter DC intermediate section
The life depends on ripple current and ambient conditions. In case of electrolyte leakage, replacement without delay is necessary.
Other capacitors (oil, film, etc.)
10 to 15
Diode rectifier Inverter unitGround fault detectioncircuit
If discolored or disfigured or in case of insulation oil leakage of oil capacitor, replacement without delay is necessary.
Wire
wound parts
Electromagnetic contactor, auxiliary relay
5 to 10Relay unitAuxiliary relay circuit, etc.
Normally excited coil life is given. Contact reaches its end of life due to wear after approximately 1 million operations electrically and 10 million operations mechanically.
Transformer, reactor
10 to 30Transformer panelControl output panel inside
If insulation material is deteriorated by overheat of winding, replacement is necessary.
Coolin
g de
vice
Cooling fan (bearing)
2(Approximately
20,000 hours)
Transformer panel insideInverter panel inside
As bearings may get worn due to long-term operation, a faulty bearing may cause the motor to burn. Therefore, it must be replaced as soon as such a sign is recognized.
Pro
tective
devic
e
Fuse 5 to 10
Diode rectifier input section (inverter DC section)Others
Will have to be replaced every 5 to 10 years to ensure the reliability.
Oth
ers
MCCB (FAB) 10 to 15Control output panel inside
Will have to be replaced every 5 to 10 years to ensure the reliability.
Meters 10 to 15Control output panel inside
Will have to be replaced every 5 to 10 years to ensure the reliability.
Indicator lamp 1 to 2Control output panel inside
Other than LED type.
Air filter 1 In each panel
Must be replaced approximately every year although depending on dust contained in air. Must be replaced and cleaned oftener than usual in dusty environment.
8-1